2. 释义的注释巴利
2. Niddesavaṇṇanā
单一释义的注释巴利
1. Ekakaniddesavaṇṇanā
1 现在,为了从开头开始逐一分别说明已经安立好的论母,而说“什么是时解脱者”等等。其中,“此处”是指在众生世间。“某一个人”是指某一个人。“按时机、按时机”这里应当按处格来理解其含义,也就是说“在每一个时机上”。“以时机、以时机”是前者的同义词。“八解脱”是指色界和无色界的八种等至。因为它们从对立之法中解脱出来,所以名为“解脱”。“以身体”是指与解脱俱生的名身。“触证而住”是指获得之后而安住。那么,他在什么时候触证解脱而住呢?对于想要入等至的人来说,确实有时机,也有非时机。其中,清晨照料身体的时间、执行义务的时间,是入等至的非时机。但是,在照料身体、执行义务之后,进入住处坐下,直到乞食的时间还没到来,在这段时间里,就是入等至的时机。巴利 注疏 2
1. Idāni yathāṭhapitaṃ mātikaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya vibhajitvā dassetuṃ – katamo ca puggalo samayavimuttotiādimāha. Tattha idhāti imasmiṃ sattaloke. Ekacco puggaloti eko puggalo. Kālena kālanti ettha bhummavasena attho veditabbo. Ekekasmiṃ kāleti vuttaṃ hoti. Samayena samayanti idaṃ purimasseva vevacanaṃ. Aṭṭha vimokkheti rūpāvacarārūpāvacaraaṭṭhasamāpattiyo. Tāsañhi paccanīkadhammehi vimuccanato vimokkhoti nāmaṃ. Kāyenāti vimokkhasahajātena nāmakāyena. Phusitvā viharatīti paṭilabhitvā iriyati. Katamasmiṃ panesa kāle vimokkhe phusitvā viharatīti? Samāpattiṃ samāpajjitukāmassa hi kālo nāma atthi, akālo nāma atthi. Tattha pātova sarīrapaṭijagganakālo, vattakaraṇakālo ca samāpajjanassa akālo nāma. Sarīraṃ pana paṭijaggitvā vattaṃ katvā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pavisitvā nisinnassa yāva piṇḍāya gamanakālo nāgacchati, etasmiṃ antare samāpajjanassa kālo nāma.
不过,如果观察托钵的时间之后才出发,那么礼塔的时间、被比丘僧团围绕站在思惟处的时间、前往托钵的时间、在村里行走的时间、在食堂喝粥的时间、做义务工作的时间——这些也都是入定的非时。但如果在食堂里有僻静的地方,而用餐时间还没到,在这段时间内也是入定的适时。而用餐的时间、回寺院的时间、收拾钵和衣的时间、做白天义务工作的时间、接受提问的时间——这些也是入定的非时。所谓非时,就是不适时。除了所有这些之外,在其余的时间、在适当的时机,以与八解脱俱生的名身获得并安住于前面所说的八解脱,就说他“在这里,有某一个人……而住”。巴利
Piṇḍāya gamanakālaṃ pana sallakkhetvā nikkhantassa cetiyavandanakālo, bhikkhusaṅghaparivutassa vitakkamāḷake ṭhānakālo piṇḍāya gamanakālo gāme caraṇakālo; āsanasālāya yāgupānakālo vattakaraṇakāloti ayampi samāpajjanassa akālo nāma. Āsanasālāya pana vivitte okāse sati yāva bhattakālo nāgacchati, etasmimpi antare samāpajjanassa kālo nāma. Bhattaṃ pana bhuñjanakālo, vihāragamanakālo, pattacīvarapaṭisāmanakālo, divāvattakaraṇakālo, paripucchādānakāloti ayampi samāpajjanassa akālo nāma. Yo akālo, sveva asamayo. Taṃ sabbampi ṭhapetvā avasese kāle kāle, samaye samaye vuttappakāre aṭṭha vimokkhe sahajātanāmakāyena paṭilabhitvā viharanto, ‘‘idhekacco puggalo…pe… viharatī’’ti vuccati.
而且,他以与自身俱生的名法去触证那些俱生的名法,这确实就叫“触证”;他以近行定去触证安止定,这也叫“触证”。前一个安止定触证后一个安止定,这也叫“触证”。因为,凡是与某一法俱生的那些法,它们就是由那一法所获得的;它们也被说成是被触所触的。近行定也是获得安止定的因,同样,前一个安止定是后一个安止定的因。在这里,应当这样理解俱生法对俱生法的触证:初禅有寻等五支,所以是五支禅。除去这些支,其余超过五十种法,就叫做四蕴。他以这个名身触证并获得初禅等至解脱,然后安住其中。第二禅有喜、乐、心一境性三支,所以是三支禅;第三禅有乐、心一境性二支,所以是二支禅;第四禅有舍、心一境性二支,所以是二支禅;同样,空无边处……乃至非想非非想处也是如此。除去那些支,其余超过五十种法,就叫做四蕴。他以这个名身触证并获得非想非非想处等至解脱,然后安住其中。巴利
Apicesa saphassakehi sahajātanāmadhammehi sahajātadhamme phusatiyeva nāma, upacārena appanaṃ phusatiyeva nāma. Purimāya appanāya aparaṃ appanaṃ phusatiyeva. Yena hi saddhiṃ ye dhammā sahajātā, tena te paṭiladdhā nāma honti. Phassenāpi phuṭṭhāyeva nāma honti. Upacārampi appanāya paṭilābhakāraṇameva, tathā purimā appanā aparaappanāya. Tatrāssa evaṃ sahajātehi sahajātānaṃ phusanā veditabbā – paṭhamajjhānañhi vitakkādīhi pañcaṅgikaṃ. Tasmiṃ ṭhapetvā tāni aṅgāni sesā atirekapaṇṇāsadhammā cattāro khandhā nāma honti. Tena nāmakāyena paṭhamajjhānasamāpattivimokkhaṃ phusitvā paṭilabhitvā viharati. Dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ pītisukhacittekaggatāhi tivaṅgikaṃ, tatiyaṃ sukhacittekaggatāhi duvaṅgikaṃ, catutthaṃ upekkhācittekaggatāhi duvaṅgikaṃ, tathā ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanañca. Tattha ṭhapetvā tāni aṅgāni sesā atirekapaṇṇāsadhammā cattāro khandhā nāma honti. Tena nāmakāyena nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattivimokkhaṃ phusitvā paṭilabhitvā viharati.
以慧见,是指以观慧照见诸行,以道慧照见四谛法。某些漏已尽,是指各各已尽,即初道等所应断的漏已尽。这里说此人称为时解脱者。在此,获得八等至的凡夫也可以说以那名身触证而住。但圣典中说“某些漏已尽”,而凡夫并没有已尽的漏,所以他不被包含在内。获得八等至的漏尽者也可以说以那名身触证而住,但他没有未尽的漏,所以也不被包含在内。应知“时解脱者”只是三种有学的名称——入流者、一来者、不来者。巴利
Paññāya cassa disvāti vipassanāpaññāya saṅkhāragataṃ, maggapaññāya catusaccadhamme passitvā. Ekacce āsavā parikkhīṇā hontīti upaḍḍhupaḍḍhā paṭhamamaggādivajjhā āsavā parikkhīṇā honti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo samayavimuttoti ettha aṭṭhasamāpattilābhī puthujjano tena nāmakāyena phusitvā viharatīti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘ekacce āsavā parikkhīṇā’’ti vuttaṃ. Puthujjanassa ca khīṇā āsavā nāma natthi, tasmā so na gahito. Aṭṭhasamāpattilābhī khīṇāsavopi tena nāmakāyena phusitvā viharatīti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Tassa pana aparikkhīṇāsavā nāma natthi, tasmā sopi na gahito. Samayavimuttoti pana tiṇṇaṃ sotāpannasakadāgāmianāgāmīnaṃyevetaṃ nāmanti veditabbaṃ.
2 在“非时解脱”的解说中,应当依照前面所说的方式来了知。
不过,这里所说的“非时解脱者”,是干观漏尽者的名称。然而,干观者、入流者、一来者、不来者、获得八等至的漏尽者以及凡夫,都不包括在这两种人当中,他们被称为“超出这两种人之外的人”。
因此,导师凭着自己佛陀的善觉悟,把下面已收摄和未收摄的内容都汇集起来,连同后面的偈颂一起编入教说,而说了“一切圣者”等话。
其中,“圣解脱”是指因为远离烦恼而被称为“圣”的出世间解脱。这里要表达的意思是:对于进入外在八种等至的人来说,有入定的时机,也有不入定的时机;但对于以道解脱而解脱的人来说,没有所谓时机或非时机。一个人如果信心强、观已经启动,那么无论他是在走、在站、在坐、在躺、在咀嚼、在进食,都没有不证得道果的。所以说,对于以道解脱而解脱的人,没有时机或非时机。法王把下面已收摄和未收摄的内容都汇集起来,连同这后面的偈颂一起编入教说。
获得等至的凡夫,也不包括在这个教说里。不过,如果亲近这样的人,就可能依着被等至镇伏的烦恼,而说他是时解脱的状态。巴利 注疏 2
2. Asamayavimuttaniddese – purimasadisaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Asamayavimuttoti panettha sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sukkhavipassakā pana sotāpannasakadāgāmianāgāmino aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino ca khīṇāsavā puthujjanā ca imasmiṃ duke na labbhanti, dukamuttakapuggalā nāma honti. Tasmā satthā attano buddhasubuddhatāya heṭṭhā gahite ca aggahite ca saṅkaḍḍhitvā saddhiṃ piṭṭhivaṭṭakehi tantiṃ āropento sabbepi ariyapuggalātiādimāha. Tattha ariye vimokkheti kilesehi ārakattā ariyeti saṅkhaṃ gate lokuttaravimokkhe. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – bāhirānañhi aṭṭhannaṃ samāpattīnaṃ samāpajjantassa samayopi atthi asamayopi. Maggavimokkhena vimuccanassa samayo vā asamayo vā natthi. Yassa saddhā balavatī, vipassanā ca āraddhā, tassa gacchantassa tiṭṭhantassa nisīdantassa nipajjantassa khādantassa bhuñjantassa maggaphalapaṭivedho nāma na hotīti natthi. Iti maggavimokkhena vimuccanassa samayo vā asamayo vā natthīti heṭṭhā gahite ca aggahite ca saṅkaḍḍhitvā imaṃ piṭṭhivaṭṭakaṃ tantiṃ āropesi dhammarājā. Samāpattilābhī puthujjano imāyapi tantiyā aggahitova. Bhajāpiyamāno pana samāpattivikkhambhitānaṃ kilesānaṃ vasena samayavimuttabhāvaṃ bhajeyya.
3 在解说“坏法与非坏法”时:如果一个人已经证得的等至会败坏、消失,那它就是坏法。所谓“与色俱行”,是指与被称为色相的色一起生起。意思是说,与它一同生起、不离开色所缘的四种色界禅那。所谓“与无色俱行”,是指不同于色、不是色的无色。意思是说,与无色一起生起、与它一同生起、不离开无色所缘的四种无色界禅那。所谓“不是随意获得者”,是因为没有通过五种方式修成熟练自在,不能按自己想要的方式获得,所以叫不是随意获得者,也就是等至不纯熟的人。所谓“不是无苦获得者”,就是苦获得者、难获得者。一个人在修习时,要压制烦恼,达到近行定,达到安止定,获得心之匣,只有靠苦、靠难、靠造作、靠加行,辛苦努力才能达到那种成就,这就叫不是无苦获得者。所谓“不是无艰难获得者”,就是不能广大获得的人,不能把等至持续长久。意思是说,只让心识生起一两个刹那,就很快出定了。巴利 注疏 1
3. Kuppadhammākuppadhammaniddesesu – yassa adhigato samāpattidhammo kuppati nassati, so kuppadhammo. Rūpasahagatānanti rūpanimittasaṅkhātena rūpena sahagatānaṃ. Tena saddhiṃ pavattānaṃ na vinā rūpārammaṇānaṃ catunnaṃ rūpāvacarajjhānānanti attho. Arūpasahagatānanti rūpato aññaṃ, na rūpanti arūpaṃ. Arūpena sahagatānaṃ tena saddhiṃ pavattānaṃ na vinā arūpārammaṇānaṃ catunnaṃ arūpāvacarajjhānānanti attho. Na nikāmalābhīti pañcahākārehi aciṇṇavasitāya icchitākārena aladdhattā na nikāmalābhī. Appaguṇasamāpattikoti attho. Na akicchalābhīti kicchalābhī dukkhalābhī. Yo āgamanamhi kilese vikkhambhento upacāraṃ pāpento appanaṃ pāpento cittamañjūsaṃ labhanto dukkhena kicchena sasaṅkhārena sappayogena kilamanto taṃ sampadaṃ pāpuṇituṃ sakkoti, so na akicchalābhī nāma. Na akasiralābhīti avipulalābhī. Samāpattiṃ appetvā addhānaṃ pharituṃ na sakkoti. Ekaṃ dve cittavāre vattetvā sahasāva vuṭṭhātīti attho.
想在哪里入定,就在那个地方入定后坐着。想入哪种定,就入哪种定后坐着——不管是遍禅、入出息念禅、梵住禅,还是不净禅,想入哪一种等至就入哪一种后坐着。想坐多久,就按时间长短,想坐多久就坐多久。这里说的是:不管在什么地方、入哪一种等至、坐多长时间,他想入定或出定,都没办法在那些地方、那些等至、那段时间里随意入定或出定。或者,他仰望月亮或太阳,心里划定:“等这月亮或太阳走到某个位置时,我就出定。”这样入禅那的人,却没法按自己划定的时间出定,中途就出定了;这是因为等至还不纯熟的缘故。巴利
Yatthicchakanti yasmiṃ okāse samāpattiṃ appetvā nisīdituṃ icchati. Yadicchakanti kasiṇajjhānaṃ vā ānāpānajjhānaṃ vā brahmavihārajjhānaṃ vā asubhajjhānaṃ vāti yaṃ yaṃ samāpattiṃ appetvā nisīdituṃ icchati. Yāvaticchakanti addhānaparicchedena yattakaṃ kālaṃ icchati. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yattha yattha yaṃ yaṃ samāpattiṃ yattakaṃ addhānaṃ samāpajjitumpi vuṭṭhātumpi icchati, tattha tattha taṃ taṃ samāpattiṃ tattakaṃ addhānaṃ samāpajjitumpi vuṭṭhātumpi na sakkoti. Candaṃ vā sūriyaṃ vā ulloketvā ‘imasmiṃ cande vā sūriye vā ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ gate vuṭṭhahissāmī’ti paricchinditvā jhānaṃ samāpanno yathāparicchedena vuṭṭhātuṃ na sakkoti, antarāva vuṭṭhāti; samāpattiyā appaguṇatāyāti.
“由于放逸”是指以放逸为因。“这被称为”是指:这样类型的人被称为坏法者。不过,这是获得八等至的凡夫、入流者、一来者这三种人的名称。因为他们的定障碍法和观障碍法没有被好好镇伏、没有被好好清除,所以他们的等至会消失、会退失。而这并不是因为破戒,也不是因为违犯过失。而且,这不是重大解脱法,会因为一点点应做的事,或者仅仅因为违背义务就消失。巴利
Pamādamāgammāti pamādaṃ paṭicca. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evaṃvidho puggalo kuppadhammoti vuccati. Idaṃ pana aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino puthujjanassa sotāpannassa sakadāgāminoti tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ nāmaṃ. Etesañhi samādhipāribandhakā vipassanāpāribandhakā ca dhammā na suvikkhambhitā, na suvikkhālitā, tena tesaṃ samāpatti nassati parihāyati. Sā ca kho neva sīlabhedena, nāpattivītikkamena. Na garukamokkhadhammo panesa appamattakenapi kiccakaraṇīyena vā vattabhedamattakena vā nassati.
这里有一个事例:据说,有一位长老能入等至。他进村托钵时,孩子们在寺院里玩耍后离开了。长老回来后,心想“寺院应该打扫一下”,但没有打扫就进了精舍,坐下想:“我要入等至。”他却无法入定,于是想:“到底是什么障碍?”他便审察自己的戒,没看到有丝毫违犯;又查看:“是不是有义务上的过失?”他发现寺院还没打扫,就打扫完,然后进精舍坐下,一坐下就入了等至。巴利
Tatridaṃ vatthu – eko kira thero samāpattiṃ vaḷañjeti. Tasmiṃ piṇḍāya gāmaṃ paviṭṭhe dārakā pariveṇe kīḷitvā pakkamiṃsu. Thero āgantvā ‘pariveṇaṃ sammajjitabba’nti cintetvā asammajjitvā vihāraṃ pavisitvā ‘samāpattiṃ appessāmī’ti nisīdi. So appetuṃ asakkonto, ‘kiṃ nu kho āvaraṇa’nti sīlaṃ āvajjanto appamattakampi vītikkamaṃ adisvā ‘vattabhedo nu kho atthī’ti olokento pariveṇassa asammaṭṭhabhāvaṃ ñatvā sammajjitvā pavisitvā nisīdanto samāpattiṃ appentova nisīdi.
4 4. 不坏法的解说,应当依照前面所说的对立面来理解。“不坏法”这个名称,是指获得八等至的阿那含和漏尽者这两种人。因为他们的定障碍和观障碍已经被很好地镇伏、很好地清除;因此,他们即使以谈笑、喜欢群聚等事务,或者以其他任何适合自己的放逸方式度过时光,等至也不会被破坏、不会消失。然而,纯观行者中的入流者、一来者、不还者、漏尽者,则不包括在这个对论中;他们被称为对论之外的人。因此,导师以自己的正觉善觉之智,把前面已摄取和未摄取的都汇集起来,在这个对论中也连同背转者一起纳入教说,而宣说“一切圣者”等语。因为八等至的破坏、消失是可能有的,但出世间法一旦证悟,就绝没有破坏、消失可言,所以这样说。巴利 注疏 1
4. Akuppadhammaniddeso vuttapaṭipakkhavaseneva veditabbo. Akuppadhammoti idaṃ pana aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino anāgāmissa ceva khīṇāsavassa cāti dvinnaṃ puggalānaṃ nāmaṃ. Tesañhi samādhipāribandhakā vipassanāpāribandhakā ca dhammā suvikkhambhitā suvikkhālitā; tena tesaṃ bhassasaṅgaṇikārāmādikiccena vā aññena vā yena kenaci attano anurūpena pamādena vītināmentānampi samāpatti na kuppati, na nassati. Sukkhavipassakā pana sotāpannasakadāgāmianāgāmikhīṇāsavā imasmiṃ duke na labbhanti; dukamuttakapuggalā nāma honti. Tasmā satthā attano buddhasubuddhatāya heṭṭhā gahite ca aggahite ca saṅkaḍḍhitvā imasmimpi duke saddhiṃ piṭṭhivaṭṭakehi tantiṃ āropento sabbepi ariyapuggalātiādimāha. Aṭṭhannañhi samāpattīnaṃ kuppanaṃ nassanaṃ bhaveyya, lokuttaradhammassa pana sakiṃ paṭividdhassa kuppanaṃ nassanaṃ nāma natthi, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
5 退法与不退法的解说,也应该按照坏法与不坏法的解说方式来理解。只不过在这里,是就人因为放逸而使诸法退失或不退失这一点来把握的,这只是说法方式上的一种差别而已。其余各处也都与此相同。巴利 注疏 1
5. Parihānadhammāparihānadhammaniddesāpi kuppadhammākuppadhammaniddesavaseneva veditabbā. Kevalañhi idha puggalassa pamādaṃ paṭicca dhammānaṃ parihānampi aparihānampi gahitanti idaṃ pariyāyadesanāmattameva nānaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha tādisameva.
7 第七、思能者的解说——“思能者”是指有能力让思不衰退的人。“如果继续思惟”,就是如果进入等至。因为正在进入等至的人,就叫作继续思惟。这样的人不会退失,另一种人则会退失。巴利 注疏 2
7. Cetanābhabbaniddese – cetanābhabboti cetanāya aparihāniṃ āpajjituṃ bhabbo. Sace anusañcetetīti, sace samāpajjati. Samāpattiñhi samāpajjanto anusañceteti nāma. So na parihāyati, itaro parihāyati.
8 8. 关于“能守护者”的解说——“能守护者”是指有能力让守护不退失的人。所谓“如果守护”,就是如果舍弃无益的法、修习有益的法而进入等至。这样修行的人,就叫做守护。这样的人不会退失,另一种人则会退失。巴利 注疏 1
8. Anurakkhaṇābhabbaniddese – anurakkhaṇābhabboti anurakkhaṇāya aparihāniṃ āpajjituṃ bhabbo. Sace anurakkhatīti sace anupakāradhamme pahāya upakāradhamme sevanto samāpajjati. Evañhi paṭipajjanto anurakkhati nāma. So na parihāyati, itaro parihāyati.
这两种能力都能建立并稳固等至。不过,从“能思”和“能护”两方面来看,“能护”更强。因为“能思”者分不清哪些法有帮助、哪些法没帮助。分不清的时候,他就会推开、排除有帮助的法,反而去修习没帮助的法。他这样修习,就会从等至退失。“能护”者则分得清哪些法有帮助、哪些法没帮助。分得清的时候,他就会推开、排除没帮助的法,而去修习有帮助的法。他这样修习,就不会从等至退失。巴利
Ime dvepi samāpattiṃ ṭhapetuṃ thāvaraṃ kātuṃ paṭibalā. Cetanābhabbato pana anurakkhaṇābhabbova balavataro. Cetanābhabbo hi upakārānupakāre dhamme na jānāti. Ajānanto upakāradhamme nudati nīharati, anupakāradhamme sevati. So te sevanto samāpattito parihāyati . Anurakkhaṇābhabbo upakārānupakāre dhamme jānāti. Jānanto anupakāradhamme nudati nīharati, upakāradhamme sevati. So te sevanto samāpattito na parihāyati.
就像有两个看守田地的人,一个得了黄疸病,身体有病,受不了寒冷等等;另一个没有病,能忍受寒冷等等。有病的那个人不下到田里的低矮茅屋去,放弃了夜间的守护和白天的守护。结果白天鹦鹉、孔雀之类的鸟飞进田里,啄食稻穗;夜里鹿、野猪之类的野兽闯进来,像把打谷场碾平一样,把庄稼糟蹋一通才走。他因为自己懈怠,最后连做种子的那么一点收成都得不到。另一个人不放弃夜间的守护和白天的守护。他因为自己不放逸,从一卡利沙那么大的田地里,就能收到四车甚至八车的粮食。巴利
Yathā hi dve khettapālā eko paṇḍurogena sarogo akkhamo sītādīnaṃ, eko arogo sītādīnaṃ saho. Sarogo heṭṭhākuṭiṃ na otarati, rattārakkhaṃ divārakkhaṃ vijahati. Tassa divā sukamorādayo khettaṃ otaritvā sālisīsaṃ khādanti, rattiṃ migasūkarādayo pavisitvā khalaṃ tacchi taṃ viya chetvā gacchanti. So attano pamattakāraṇā puna bījamattampi na labhati. Itaro rattārakkhaṃ divārakkhaṃ na vijahati. So attano appamattakāraṇā ekakarīsato cattāripi aṭṭhapi sakaṭāni labhati.
在这里,应当把有思惟能力的人看作像有病的田地守护者,把有守护能力的人看作像无病的人。就像有病的守护者因为自己放逸,连一点点种子都得不到;同样,有思惟能力的人不了知哪些法有益、哪些法无益,舍弃有益的法而亲近无益的法,他的等至就会退失。而另一个人因为自己不放逸,仅凭一卡利沙的田地就能收获四车乃至八车;同样,有守护能力的人了知哪些法有益、哪些法无益,舍弃无益的法而亲近有益的法,他的等至就不会退失。应当这样了知:如此,比起有思惟能力的人,有守护能力的人更能使等至稳固,力量更大。巴利
Tattha sarogakhettapālo viya cetanābhabbo, arogo viya anurakkhaṇābhabbo daṭṭhabbo. Sarogassa attano pamādena puna bījamattassapi alabhanaṃ viya cetanābhabbassa upakārānupakāre dhamme ajānitvā upakāre pahāya anupakāre sevantassa samāpattiyā parihānaṃ. Itarassa attano appamādena ekakarīsamattato catuaṭṭhasakaṭauddharaṇaṃ viya anurakkhaṇābhabbassa upakārānupakāre dhamme jānitvā anupakāre pahāya upakāre sevantassa samāpattiyā aparihānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ cetanābhabbato anurakkhaṇābhabbova samāpattiṃ thāvaraṃ kātuṃ balavataroti veditabbo.
9 在凡夫的解释中,“三结”就是见结、戒禁取结和疑结。这些结据说是在果位刹那被断除的。但这里要说明的是,这个人即使在果位刹那也没有这种状态。“那些法”指的是那些结法。因为在道位刹那,他才算是在为断除那些结而修行。但这个人即使在道位刹那也没有这种状态。到此为止应当知道,这里说的是一个舍弃了业处的粗浅愚钝凡夫。巴利
9. Puthujjananiddese – tīṇi saṃyojanānīti diṭṭhisaṃyojanasīlabbataparāmāsasaṃyojanavicikicchāsaṃyojanāni. Etāni hi phalakkhaṇe pahīnāni nāma honti. Ayaṃ pana phalakkhaṇepi na hotīti dasseti. Tesaṃ dhammānanti tesaṃ saṃyojanadhammānaṃ. Maggakkhaṇasmiñhi tesaṃ pahānāya paṭipanno nāma hoti. Ayaṃ pana maggakkhaṇepi na hoti. Ettāvatā vissaṭṭhakammaṭṭhāno thūlabālaputhujjanova idha kathitoti veditabbo.
10 第十、种姓智的解说中,所谓“那些法”,是指与种姓智一同生起的那五十多种善法。所谓“圣法”,是指出世间道。所谓“进入”,就是趣入、产生、显现。所谓“这被称为”,是指此人以缘取涅槃的智慧,超越了一切凡夫的称谓、凡夫的种姓、凡夫的范畴、凡夫的假名安立,而进入圣者的称谓、圣者的种姓、圣者的范畴、圣者的假名安立,因此被称为种姓者。巴利 注疏 1
10. Gotrabhuniddese – yesaṃ dhammānanti yesaṃ gotrabhuñāṇena saddhiṃ uppannānaṃ paropaṇṇāsakusaladhammānaṃ. Ariyadhammassāti lokuttaramaggassa. Avakkanti hotīti okkanti nibbatti pātubhāvo hoti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ nibbānārammaṇena ñāṇena sabbaṃ puthujjanasaṅkhaṃ puthujjanagottaṃ puthujjanamaṇḍalaṃ puthujjanapaññattiṃ atikkamitvā ariyasaṅkhaṃ ariyagottaṃ ariyamaṇḍalaṃ ariyapaññattiṃ okkamanato gotrabhūpuggalo nāma vuccati.
11 11. 在“怖畏止息者”的解说中——“因怖畏而止息”,就是怖畏止息者。七有学以及凡夫,都是因为害怕,才远离恶、不造恶。其中,凡夫害怕四种怖畏:恶趣怖、轮回怖、烦恼怖、讥嫌怖。在这四种里,从“应当害怕”这个意义上说,恶趣本身就是怖畏,所以叫恶趣怖。其余三种也是同样的道理。其中,凡夫害怕恶趣怖,心里想:“如果你造了恶,四个苦界就像张开大嘴等着的饥饿蟒蛇一样,你在那里受苦的时候会变成什么样?”因为害怕恶趣怖,所以不造恶。而无始以来的轮回本身,就叫轮回怖。一切不善法,就叫烦恼怖。被人指责,就叫讥嫌怖。凡夫也是因为害怕这些,才不造恶。但入流者、一来者、不来者这三位有学,因为已经超越了恶趣,所以只害怕其余三种怖畏,因此不造恶。处在道位上的有学,或者因为还会再来,或者因为怖畏还没有彻底断除,所以称为怖畏止息者。漏尽者在这四种怖畏中,一个也不怕。因为他已经完全断除了怖畏,所以称为无怖畏止息者。那么,他难道连讥嫌也不怕吗?不怕。不过可以说,他是防护讥嫌。就像多努莲花池村的漏尽长老那样。巴利 注疏 1
11. Bhayūparataniddese – bhayena uparatoti bhayūparato. Sattapi sekkhā puthujjanā ca bhāyitvā pāpato oramanti pāpaṃ na karonti . Tattha puthujjanā duggatibhayaṃ, vaṭṭabhayaṃ, kilesabhayaṃ, upavādabhayanti cattāri bhayāni bhāyanti. Tesu bhāyitabbaṭṭhena duggatiyeva bhayaṃ duggatibhayaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Tattha puthujjano ‘sace tvaṃ pāpaṃ karissasi, cattāro apāyā mukhaṃ vivaritvā ṭhitacchātaajagarasadisā, tesu dukkhaṃ anubhavanto kathaṃ bhavissasī’ti duggatibhayaṃ bhāyitvā pāpaṃ na karoti. Anamataggasaṃsāravaṭṭaṃyeva pana vaṭṭabhayaṃ nāma. Sabbampi akusalaṃ kilesabhayaṃ nāma. Garahā pana upavādabhayaṃ nāma. Tānipi bhāyitvā puthujjano pāpaṃ na karoti. Sotāpannasakadāgāmianāgāmino pana tayo sekkhā duggatiṃ atītattā sesāni tīṇi bhayāni bhāyitvā pāpaṃ na karonti. Maggaṭṭhakasekkhā āgamanavasena vā asamucchinnabhayattā vā bhayūparatā nāma honti. Khīṇāsavo imesu catūsu bhayesu ekampi na bhāyati. So hi sabbaso samucchinnabhayo; tasmā abhayūparatoti vuccati. Kiṃ pana so upavādampi na bhāyatīti? Na bhāyati. Upavādaṃ pana rakkhatīti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Doṇuppalavāpigāme khīṇāsavatthero viya.
12 第十二、不能入者解说:不能入于正性决定,就是不能入者。业障指五种无间业。烦恼障指定邪见。果报障指无因或二因的结生。无信指对佛、法、僧没有信心。无欲指缺乏想要修不善的意欲。除了赡部洲以外,其余三洲的居民应当知道就是这类人,因为他们已落入无欲的状态。劣慧指缺乏有分慧。不能指没有获得道果的资粮。决定指道决定、正性决定。入:就是不能进入、趣入、安立于诸善法中的正性决定。巴利 注疏 1
12. Abhabbāgamananiddese – sammattaniyāmāgamanassa abhabboti abhabbāgamano. Kammāvaraṇenāti pañcavidhena ānantariyakammena. Kilesāvaraṇenāti niyatamicchādiṭṭhiyā. Vipākāvaraṇenāti ahetukaduhetukapaṭisandhiyā. Assaddhāti buddhadhammasaṅghesu saddhārahitā. Acchandikāti kattukamyatākusalacchandarahitā. Te ṭhapetvā jambudīpaṃ itaradīpattayavāsino veditabbā. Tesu hi manussā acchandikabhāvaṃ paviṭṭhā nāma. Duppaññāti bhavaṅgapaññārahitā. Abhabbāti appaṭiladdhamaggaphalūpanissayā. Niyāmanti magganiyāmaṃ, sammattaniyāmaṃ. Okkamitunti etaṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattasaṅkhātaṃ niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ pavisituṃ tattha patiṭṭhātuṃ abhabbā.
13 能入者的解说,应当按前面所说的相反方式来理解。在这个二法组里,凡是五种无间业者、定邪见者、已取无因或二因结生者、不信佛等者、没有想要去做的意欲者、有分慧不圆满者、没有道果资粮者——所有这些人都不能进入正性决定;与此相反的人,则说为能入者。巴利
13. Bhabbāgamananiddeso vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbo. Evamimasmiṃ duke ye ca puggalā pañcānantariyakā, ye ca niyatamicchādiṭṭhikā, yehi ca ahetukaduhetukapaṭisandhi gahitā , ye ca buddhādīnaṃ na saddahanti, yesañca kattukamyatāchando natthi, ye ca aparipuṇṇabhavaṅgapaññā, yesañca maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo natthi, te sabbepi sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamituṃ abhabbā, viparītā bhabbāti vuttā.
14 14. 在解说“决定”与“不定”时——“无间业者”,就是具有无间业的人。“邪见者”,就是具有决定邪见的人。所有这些人都因为决定要堕入地狱,所以称为“决定者”。而八种圣者,因为决定要趋向正性,为了证得更高的道与果,以及为了无余涅槃,所以称为“决定者”。其余的人则没有固定的趣向。就像把棍杖抛向空中,它落地时,无法知道“会用顶端、中段还是根部触地”;同样,因为没有“将会投生到某一趣”的确定性,所以应当知道他们称为“不定者”。至于说北俱卢洲的人有决定的趣向,那并不是依决定法而说的。只有邪性决定法和正性决定法,才称为“决定”。这个关于人的决定之说,就是依它们而说的。巴利 注疏 1
14. Niyatāniyataniddese – ānantarikāti āntarikakammasamaṅgino. Micchādiṭṭhikāti niyatamicchādiṭṭhisamaṅgino. Sabbepi hete nirayassa atthāya niyatattā niyatā nāma. Aṭṭha pana ariyapuggalā sammābhāvāya uparūparimaggaphalatthāya ceva anupādāparinibbānatthāya ca niyatattā niyatā nāma. Avasesapuggalā pana anibaddhagatikā. Yathā ākāse khittadaṇḍo pathaviyaṃ patanto ‘aggena vā majjhena vā mūlena vā patissatī’ti na ñāyati; evameva ‘asukagatiyā nāma nibbattissantī’ti niyamābhāvā aniyatā nāmāti veditabbā. Yā pana uttarakurukānaṃ niyatagatikatā vuttā, na sā niyatadhammavasena. Micchattasammattaniyatadhammāyeva hi niyatā nāma. Tesañca vasenāyaṃ puggalaniyamo kathitoti.
15 15. 行道者释义——“具道者”指处于道位的人。他们因为为了证果而修道,所以称为行道者。“具果者”指因为具足证得果而称为具果者。因为他们从证得果的时候起,即使没有进入果等至,也仍然称为住立于果。巴利
15. Paṭipannakaniddese – maggasamaṅginoti maggaṭṭhakapuggalā. Te hi phalatthāya paṭipannattā paṭipannakā nāma. Phalasamaṅginoti phalapaṭilābhasamaṅgitāya phalasamaṅgino. Phalapaṭilābhato paṭṭhāya hi te phalasamāpattiṃ asamāpannāpi phale ṭhitāyeva nāma.
16 16. 等首者释义——“不先不后”是指不在前也不在后,意思是就在同一刹那(完成)。“遍尽”就是完全灭尽。这个人就称为等首者。而这位等首者有三种:威仪等首者、病等首者、命等首者。其中,有人在经行时就开始修观,证得阿罗汉后果后,仍在经行中般涅槃,就像红莲长老那样;有人站立时就修观,证得阿罗汉果后,仍在站立中般涅槃,就像住在拘吒山寺的帝沙长老那样;有人坐着时修观,证得阿罗汉果后,仍在坐姿中般涅槃;有人躺着时修观,证得阿罗汉果后,仍在躺卧中般涅槃——这就称为威仪等首者。巴利 注疏 1
16. Samasīsīniddese – apubbaṃ acarimanti apure apacchā, ekappahārenevāti attho. Pariyādānanti parikkhayo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ puggalo samasīsī nāma vuccati. So panesa tividho hoti – iriyāpathasamasīsī, rogasamasīsī, jīvitasamasīsīti. Tattha yo caṅkamantova vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ patvā caṅkamantova parinibbāti padumatthero viya; ṭhitakova vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ patvā ṭhitakova parinibbāti koṭapabbatavihāravāsītissatthero viya; nisinnova vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ patvā nisinnova parinibbāti, nipannova vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ patvā nipannova parinibbāti – ayaṃ iriyāpathasamasīsī nāma.
如果有人得了某种病,就在病中发起观禅,证得阿罗汉果之后,因为那同样的病而入般涅槃——这种人就叫作病等首者。巴利
Yo pana ekaṃ rogaṃ patvā antorogeyeva vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ patvā teneva rogena parinibbāti – ayaṃ rogasamasīsī nāma.
什么叫做“命等首者”?“首”有十三种——障碍首是渴爱,系缚首是慢,执取首是邪见,散乱首是掉举,杂染首是无明,胜解首是信,策励首是精进,现前首是念,不散乱首是定,观见首是慧,转起首是命根,行境首是解脱,行首是灭。(《无碍解道》1.87)
其中,杂染首即无明,被阿拉汉道彻底断尽。转起首即命根,被死心彻底断尽。能断尽无明的心,无法断尽命根;能断尽命根的心,无法断尽无明。能断尽无明的心是一回事,能断尽命根的心是另一回事。如果这两个“首”在同一时刻被断尽,这个人就叫做“命等首者”。巴利
Kataro jīvitasamasīsī nāma? ‘‘Sīsanti terasa sīsāni – palibodhasīsañca taṇhā, vinibandhanasīsañca māno, parāmāsasīsañca diṭṭhi, vikkhepasīsañca uddhaccaṃ, saṃkilesasīsañca avijjā, adhimokkhasīsañca saddhā, paggahasīsañca vīriyaṃ, upaṭṭhānasīsañca sati, avikkhepasīsañca samādhi, dassanasīsañca paññā, pavattasīsañca jīvitindriyaṃ, gocarasīsañca vimokkho, saṅkhārasīsañca nirodho’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.87). Tattha kilesasīsaṃ avijjaṃ arahattamaggo pariyādiyati. Pavattasīsaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ cuticittaṃ pariyādiyati. Avijjāpariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ pariyādātuṃ na sakkoti. Jīvitindriyapariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ avijjaṃ pariyādātuṃ na sakkoti. Avijjāpariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ aññaṃ, jīvitindriyapariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ aññaṃ. Yassa cetaṃ sīsadvayaṃ samaṃ pariyādānaṃ gacchati, so jīvitasamasīsī nāma.
这个“平等”是怎么回事呢?是因为刹那一致。在某个刹那中道生起时——入流道有五种省察,一来道有五种,不来道有五种,阿罗汉道有四种,共十九种省察智——他安住于这些省察智之后,沉入有分,然后般涅槃。由于这种刹那一致,这“二首的同时灭尽”就叫做“平等”。因此,这个人被称为“命等首者”。而这里所指的正是这个人。巴利
Kathamidaṃ samaṃ hotīti? Vārasamatāya. Yasmiñhi vāre maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti – sotāpattimagge pañca paccavekkhaṇāni, sakadāgāmimagge pañca, anāgāmimagge pañca, arahattamagge cattārīti ekūnavīsatiyā paccavekkhaṇañāṇe patiṭṭhāya bhavaṅgaṃ otaritvā parinibbāyati. Imāya vārasamatāya idaṃ ubhayasīsapariyādānaṃ samaṃ hoti nāma. Tenāyaṃ puggalo jīvitasamasīsīti vuccati. Ayameva ca idha adhippeto.
17 17. 关于“住劫者”的解释:“住劫者”就是能让劫停住的人,也就是具有让劫停住的能力。意思是,他有能力使劫延续下去。如果到了该燃烧的时候,那就会是燃烧的时机。所谓“只要……还不会”,是说只要这个具足道的人还没有证悟入流果,劫就还不会燃烧。即使劫正在燃烧,也会烧过之后仍停住。因为所谓的劫灭,是一种巨大的变故、巨大的作用,是以百千俱胝轮围世界同时燃烧为表现的大范围世间毁灭。他说:即使是这么大的毁灭,也会停住。但在教法还住世的时候,这种劫灭是不存在的。劫灭的时候,教法就不存在了。因为到了终点的时候,才会有所谓的劫灭。尽管如此,导师为了说明不会有障碍,举出了这个理由:“这也可能发生,但对于具足道的人,果的障碍是不可能造成的。”那么,这个人让劫停住,能停住多久呢?在道生起的那一刹那,从有分转向之后,意门转向心生起。接着是三随顺心、一种姓心、一道心、二果心、五省察智——他能让劫停住这么长的时间。他们也用外来的比喻来说明这个道理:如果在入流道具足者的头顶上方,用三股绳绑着一块一由旬大的整块岩石悬挂着,断了一股,还有两股吊着;断了两股,还有一股吊着;即使那一股也断了,它也会像云峰一样停在空中,绝不可能对这个人在道之后生起的果造成障碍。不过这个说明还是有限的,前面那个才是更大的说明。而且不只是入流道的人才让劫停住,其他具足道的人也一样让劫停住。因此,世尊把前面提到的和没提到的全都收拢在一起,连同后面那些人也一起,提出了这个结论:“所有具足道的人都是住劫者。”巴利 注疏 1
17. Ṭhitakappīniddese – ṭhito kappoti ṭhitakappo, ṭhitakappo assa atthīti ṭhitakappī. Kappaṃ ṭhapetuṃ samatthoti attho. Uḍḍayhanavelā assāti jhāyanakālo bhaveyya. Neva tāvāti yāva esa maggasamaṅgī puggalo sotāpattiphalaṃ na sacchikaroti, neva tāva kappo jhāyeyya. Jhāyamānopi ajjhāyitvāva tiṭṭheyya. Kappavināso hi nāma mahāvikāro mahāpayogo koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷassa jhāyanavasena mahālokavināso. Ayampi evaṃ mahāvināso tiṭṭheyya vāti vadati. Sāsane pana dharamāne ayaṃ kappavināso nāma natthi. Kappavināse sāsanaṃ natthi. Gatakoṭike hi kāle kappavināso nāma hoti. Evaṃ santepi satthā antarāyābhāvaṃ dīpetuṃ idaṃ kāraṇaṃ āhari – ‘‘idampi bhaveyya, maggasamaṅgino pana phalassa antarāyo na sakkā kātu’’nti. Ayaṃ pana puggalo kappaṃ ṭhapento kittakaṃ kālaṃ ṭhapeyyāti? Yasmiṃ vāre maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, atha bhavaṅgaṃ āvaṭṭentaṃ manodvārāvajjanaṃ uppajjati. Tato tīṇi anulomāni, ekaṃ gotrabhucittaṃ, ekaṃ maggacittaṃ, dve phalacittāni, pañca paccavekkhaṇañāṇānīti ettakaṃ kālaṃ ṭhapeyya. Imaṃ panatthaṃ bāhirāya āgantukūpamāyapi evaṃ dīpayiṃsu. Sace hi sotāpattimaggasamaṅgissa matthakūpari yojanikaṃ ekagghanaselaṃ tivaṭṭāya rajjuyā bandhitvā olambeyya, ekasmiṃ vaṭṭe chinne dvīhi olambeyya, dvīsu chinnesu ekena olambeyyeva, tasmimpi chinne abbhakūṭaṃ viya ākāse tiṭṭheyya, na tveva tassa puggalassa maggānantaraphalassa antarāyaṃ kareyyāti. Ayaṃ pana dīpanā parittā, purimāva mahantā. Na kevalaṃ pana sotāpattimaggaṭṭhova kappaṃ ṭhapeti, itare maggasamaṅginopi ṭhapentiyeva. Tena bhagavā heṭṭhā gahitañca aggahitañca sabbaṃ saṅkaḍḍhitvā saddhiṃ piṭṭhivaṭṭakapuggalehi imaṃ tantiṃ āropesi – ‘‘sabbepi maggasamaṅgino puggalā ṭhitakappino’’ti.
18 18. 关于圣者的解释——因为远离烦恼,所以是圣者。因为值得与诸天在内的世间礼敬,所以是圣者。所谓“圣”的含义,就是清净的含义,因此也因清净而被称为圣者。其余的人因为不清净,所以是非圣者。巴利 注疏 1
18. Ariyaniddese – kilesehi ārakattā ariyā. Sadevakena lokena araṇīyattā ariyā. Ariyaṭṭho nāma parisuddhaṭṭhoti parisuddhattāpi ariyā. Sesā aparisuddhatāya anariyā.
19 19. 有学释义——与道相应的人在道的刹那,与果相应的人在果的刹那,都正在修学增上戒学等三学,所以叫有学。而阿罗汉在阿罗汉果的刹那,三学已经学完。此后他再也没有需要修学的事,所以叫无学。这样,七种圣者还在修学,就是有学。诸漏尽者因为在别人那里已经学完了戒等,所以叫学已无学。佛和独觉佛因为是自己觉悟的,所以叫未学无学。其余的人既不是正在修学,也不是已经学完,所以叫非有学非无学。巴利
19. Sekkhaniddese – maggasamaṅgino maggakkhaṇe, phalasamaṅgino ca phalakkhaṇe, adhisīlasikkhādikā tissopi sikkhā sikkhantiyevāti sekkhā. Arahatā pana arahattaphalakkhaṇe tisso sikkhā sikkhitā. Puna tassa sikkhanakiccaṃ natthīti asekkhā. Iti satta ariyā sikkhantīti sekkhā. Khīṇāsavā aññassa santike sīlādīnaṃ sikkhitattā sikkhitaasekkhā nāma. Buddhapaccekabuddhā sayambhūtatāya asikkhitaasekkhā nāma. Sesapuggalā neva sikkhanti na sikkhitāti nevasekkhānāsekkhā.
20 在三明释义这一节里,不论是先修成宿命通和天眼通、之后证得阿罗汉果,还是先证得阿罗汉果、之后才修成宿命通和天眼通,都同样叫作三明。不过,经教的说法是方便说,论藏的说法是究竟说,在这个地方应当依据传承来判定。因此,这里指的是先修成前二明、之后证得阿罗汉果的人。六通的情况也是这样。巴利 注疏 1
20. Tevijjaniddese – paṭhamaṃ pubbenivāsadibbacakkhuñāṇāni nibbattetvā pacchā arahattaṃ pattopi, paṭhamaṃ arahattaṃ patvā pacchā pubbenivāsadibbacakkhuñāṇanibbattakopi tevijjoyeva nāma. Suttantakathā pana pariyāyadesanā abhidhammakathā nippariyāyadesanāti imasmiṃ ṭhāne āgamanīyameva dhuraṃ. Tasmā paṭhamaṃ dve vijjā nibbattetvā pacchā arahattaṃ pattova idha adhippeto. Chaḷabhiññepi eseva nayo.
22 22. 正自觉者释义——“于先前未曾闻”,是指在最后一生证悟真理之前,未曾从任何其他人那里听闻过。然而在更早的过去诸有中,一切知菩萨曾在佛陀的教法中出家,学通三藏,履行往返承事的义务,修习业处,顺随、抵达种姓地而安住。因此,这是就最后一生无师自悟的情形而说的。那时,已圆满波罗蜜的如来,对于未曾从他人处听闻的有为法与无为法,即“这是苦……这是导致苦灭之道”,以亲证的智慧现观四圣谛。巴利 注疏 1
22. Sammāsambuddhaniddese – pubbe ananussutesūti pacchimabhave saccappaṭivedhato pubbe aññassa kassaci santike assutapubbesu. Tato purimapurimesu pana bhavesu sabbaññubodhisattā buddhasāsane pabbajitvā tīṇi piṭakāni uggahetvā gatapaccāgatavattaṃ āruyha kammaṭṭhānaṃ anulomaṃ gotrabhuṃ āhacca ṭhapenti. Tasmā pacchimabhavasmiṃyeva anācariyakabhāvaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Tadā hi tathāgato pūritapāramittā aññassa santike sāmaṃ ananussutesu saṅkhatāsaṅkhatadhammesu ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ…pe… ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti attapaccakkhena ñāṇena cattāri saccāni abhisambujjhati.
这里,“于此”指的是以证悟四圣谛为标志的阿罗汉道。“获得一切知性,并于诸力中得自在”,意思是获得一切知智,并在诸力中成就自在。因为诸佛从证得一切知智和十力智那一刻起,就再也没有别的应做之事了。就像一位出身纯正的刹帝利王子,自从灌顶即位之后,就不能说“还有某种王权我尚未得到”,因为一切都已得到了。同样,诸佛自从证得阿罗汉道那一刻起,就不能说“还有某种功德我未得到、未通达、未亲证”,因为属于一切知性的一切功德都已得到、通达、亲证了。“此被称为”,是说这样一位凭借圆满波罗蜜的威力、以圣道通达一切知性功德的士夫,就被称为正自觉者。巴利
Tattha cāti tasmiñca catusaccasambodhisaṅkhāte arahattamagge. Sabbaññutaṃ pāpuṇāti balesu ca vasībhāvanti sabbaññutaññāṇañceva balesu ca ciṇṇavasībhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti. Buddhānañhi sabbaññutaññāṇassa ceva dasabalañāṇassa ca adhigamanato paṭṭhāya aññaṃ kātabbaṃ nāma natthi. Yathā pana ubhatosujātassa khattiyakumārassa abhisekappattito paṭṭhāya ‘idaṃ nāma issariyaṃ anāgata’nti na vattabbaṃ, sabbaṃ āgatameva hoti. Evameva buddhānaṃ arahattamaggassa āgamanato paṭṭhāya ‘ayaṃ nāma guṇo na āgato, na paṭividdho, na paccakkho’ti na vattabbo, sabbepi sabbaññuguṇā āgatā paṭividdhā paccakkhakatāva honti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evaṃ pāramīpūraṇasiddhānubhāvena ariyamaggena paṭividdhasabbaññuguṇo puggalo sammāsambuddhoti vuccati.
23 23. 在独觉佛的解说中,“于先前未曾闻”这一句,其含义应依照前面所说的方式来理解。因为独觉佛也是在最后一生中,没有老师指导,仅凭自我策励的智慧证悟真理,但并不能获得一切知智以及在诸力中修习成就的自在。巴利 注疏 1
23. Paccekabuddhaniddesepi – pubbe ananussutesūti pade pubbe vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Paccekabuddhopi hi pacchimabhave anācariyako attukkaṃsikañāṇeneva paṭividdhasacco sabbaññutaññāṇañceva balesu ca ciṇṇavasībhāvaṃ na pāpuṇāti.
24 24. 在俱分解脱者的解说中:“以身触证八解脱而住”,意思是证得八种等至而住于俱生名身。“以慧见而……”是指以观慧照见诸行,以道慧彻见四圣谛,从而断尽四漏。“此被称为”,是说这样的补特伽罗就叫做俱分解脱者。他因为从两个方面、两次解脱,所以叫俱分解脱。对此,上座部的观点是:三藏小龙长老首先说:“他以等至之镇伏解脱,以道之正断解脱,所以从两面、两次得解脱。”三藏大法护长老则说:“这是依名而立的”,然后……巴利 注疏 1
24. Ubhatobhāgavimuttaniddese – aṭṭha vimokkhe kāyena phusitvā viharatīti aṭṭha samāpattiyo sahajātanāmakāyena paṭilabhitvā viharati. Paññāya cassa disvāti vipassanāpaññāya saṅkhāragataṃ, maggapaññāya cattāri saccāni passitvā cattāropi āsavā khīṇā honti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo ubhatobhāgavimutto nāmāti vuccati. Ayañhi dvīhi bhāgehi dve vāre vimuttoti ubhatobhāgavimutto. Tatrāyaṃ theravādo – tipiṭakacūḷanāgatthero tāva āha – ‘‘samāpattiyā vikkhambhanavimokkhena, maggena samucchedavimokkhena vimuttoti ubhatobhāgehi dve vāre vimutto’’ti. Tipiṭakamahādhammarakkhitatthero ‘‘nāmanissitako eso’’ti vatvā –
就像火焰被风的力量吹散,世尊说:“优婆斯瓦啊!”
它走向寂灭,不再被计入名相之中。
牟尼这样从名身中解脱出来,
他归于寂灭,却不落入名称的范畴。巴利
‘‘Accī yathā vātavegena khittā, (upasīvāti bhagavā;) Atthaṃ paleti na upeti saṅkhaṃ; Evaṃ munī nāmakāyā vimutto, Atthaṃ paleti na upeti saṅkha’’nti. (su. ni. 1080);
说已,引述经文后说:“因为从名身和色身两方面都完全解脱,所以是俱分解脱者。”三藏小无畏长老则说:“通过等至的镇伏解脱而解脱一次,通过道的正断解脱而解脱一次,因此是俱分解脱者。”这三位长老都是智者,他们认为“这三种说法都能看到道理”,于是把三种说法作为定论一并保留下来。巴利
Vatvā suttaṃ āharitvā ‘‘nāmakāyato ca rūpakāyato ca suvimuttattā ubhatobhāgavimutto’’ti āha. Tipiṭakacūḷābhayatthero panāha – ‘‘samāpattiyā vikkhambhanavimokkhena ekavāraṃ vimutto maggena samucchedavimokkhena ekavāraṃ vimuttoti ubhatobhāgavimutto’’ti. Ime pana tayopi therā paṇḍitā, ‘tiṇṇampi vāde kāraṇaṃ dissatī’ti tiṇṇampi vādaṃ tantiṃ katvā ṭhapayiṃsu.
简单来说,以无色定从色身解脱,以道从名身解脱,因为从这两方面都解脱,所以叫俱分解脱者。他有五种:前四种是依次从四种无色定每一种出定后,观照诸行而证得阿罗汉果的人;第五种是从灭尽定出定后证得阿罗汉果的不来者。其中,前四种人没有进入作为各种定最高处的灭尽定,所以按方便说法叫俱分解脱者。而证得八种定的不来者,进入灭尽定后再出定,增长观智而证得阿罗汉果,这才是按究竟义说的最上俱分解脱者。难道无色界禅不也是以舍和心一境性为两个禅支,色界第四禅也一样吗?那么,以第四禅为所依而证得阿罗汉果的人,也应该成为俱分解脱者吗?不应该这样。为什么?因为他没有从色身解脱。第四禅只从烦恼身解脱,而不是从色身解脱。所以,从第四禅出定后证得阿罗汉果的人,不叫俱分解脱者。但无色界禅既从名身解脱,也从色身解脱,因此以它为所依而证得阿罗汉果的人,应当知道就是俱分解脱者。巴利
Saṅkhepato pana arūpasamāpattiyā rūpakāyato vimutto, maggena nāmakāyato vimuttoti ubhohi bhāgehi vimuttattā ubhatobhāgavimutto. So catunnaṃ arūpasamāpattīnaṃ ekekato vuṭṭhāya saṅkhāre sammasitvā arahattaṃ pattānaṃ catunnaṃ, nirodhā vuṭṭhāya arahattaṃ pattassa anāgāmino ca vasena pañcavidho hoti. Tattha purimā cattāro samāpattisīsaṃ nirodhaṃ na samāpajjantīti pariyāyena ubhatobhāgavimuttā nāma. Aṭṭhasamāpattilābhī anāgāmī taṃ samāpajjitvā tato vuṭṭhāya vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pattoti nippariyāyena ubhatobhāgavimuttaseṭṭho nāma. Nanu ca arūpāvacarajjhānampi upekkhācittekaggatāhi duvaṅgikaṃ rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānampi, tasmā tampi padaṭṭhānaṃ katvā arahattaṃ pattena ubhatobhāgavimuttena bhavitabbanti? Na bhavitabbaṃ. Kasmā? Rūpakāyato avimuttattā. Tañhi kilesakāyatova vimuttaṃ, na rūpakāyato; tasmā tato vuṭṭhāya arahattaṃ patto ubhatobhāgavimutto nāma na hoti . Arūpāvacaraṃ pana nāmakāyato ca vimuttaṃ rūpakāyato cāti tadeva pādakaṃ katvā arahattaṃ patto ubhatobhāgavimutto hotīti veditabbo.
25 25. 在解释慧解脱的部分——“以慧而解脱,所以叫慧解脱。”这种人分为五种:纯观行者,以及从四种禅那出定后证得阿罗汉果的四种人。在这几种人当中,没有一个是获得八解脱的。正因为这样,才说“并不是获得八解脱”等话。不过,如果具有任何一种无色界禅那,那就一定叫做俱分解脱者。巴利 注疏 1
25. Paññāvimuttaniddese – paññāya vimuttoti paññāvimutto. So sukkhavipassako catūhi jhānehi vuṭṭhāya arahattaṃ pattā cattāro cāti pañcavidho hoti. Etesu hi ekopi aṭṭhavimokkhalābhī na hoti. Teneva na heva kho aṭṭha vimokkhetiādimāha. Arūpāvacarajjhānesu pana ekasmiṃ sati ubhatobhāgavimuttoyeva nāma hotīti.
26 26. 关于身证者的解释——“有些漏”是指被下面三道(预流道、一来道、不还道)所断的漏。“这称为”——这样类型的人就称为身证者。因为他亲身触证之后而作证,所以叫身证者。他先触证禅那的触,之后作证灭尽涅槃,所以也叫身证者。这个人从安住于入流果开始,一直到安住于阿罗汉道,共有六种。巴利 注疏 1
26. Kāyasakkhiniddese – ekacce āsavāti heṭṭhimamaggattayavajjhā. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo kāyasakkhīti vuccati. So hi phuṭṭhantaṃ sacchikarotīti kāyasakkhī. Jhānaphassaṃ paṭhamaṃ phusati, pacchā nirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikarotītipi kāyasakkhī. So sotāpattiphalaṭṭhaṃ ādiṃ katvā yāva arahattamaggaṭṭhā chabbidho hoti.
27 27. 在“见至者”的解说中——“这是苦”意思是:这就是苦,苦只有这么多,没有超出这个范围的苦。在苦集等(苦集、苦灭、苦灭之道)上也同样如此理解。“如实地了知”是指:除了渴爱之外,把五取蕴按照它真实的样子了知为“苦谛”。然而,渴爱使苦产生、生起、引发出来,苦从它那里生起;因此他了知它如实地是“苦集”。又因为此苦与集到达涅槃后就灭尽、寂止、不再转起;因此他了知它如实地是“苦灭”。而八支圣道则通向那苦灭;因此他了知它如实地是“这是趣向苦灭之道”。至此,已显示了不同刹那的谛之安立。现在为了显示同一刹那,说了“如来所宣说”等。其中,“如来所宣说”是指:坐于大菩提座上,由如来所证悟、所知、所显了的。“法”是指:四圣谛法。“已善见”是指:已善能照见。“已善行”是指:已善能行持,意为他以智慧于此诸法中善行。“称为”是指:如此类型之人称为见至者。此人确实已到达见之边。“诸行是苦,灭是乐”成为智。已见、已知、已证、已观,以智慧了知,故为见至。此人也如身证者一样有六种。巴利 注疏 1
27. Diṭṭhippattaniddese – idaṃ dukkhanti idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, na ito uddhaṃ dukkhaṃ. Dukkhasamudayādīsupi eseva nayo. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti ṭhapetvā taṇhaṃ pañcupādānakkhandhe ‘dukkhasacca’nti yāthāvasarasato pajānāti. Taṇhā pana dukkhaṃ janeti nibbatteti, pabhāveti, tato taṃ dukkhaṃ samudeti; tasmā naṃ ayaṃ ‘dukkhasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Yasmā pana idaṃ dukkhañca samudayo ca nibbānaṃ patvā nirujjhanti vūpasammanti appavattiṃ gacchanti; tasmā naṃ ‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Ariyo pana aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, taṃ dukkhanirodhaṃ gacchati; tena taṃ ‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Ettāvatā nānākkhaṇe saccavavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ. Idāni ekakkhaṇe dassetuṃ tathāgatappaveditātiādimāha. Tattha tathāgatappaveditāti mahābodhimaṇḍe nisīdatvā tathāgatena paṭividdhā viditā pākaṭīkatā. Dhammāti catusaccadhammā. Vodiṭṭhā hontīti sudiṭṭhā honti. Vocaritāti sucaritā. Tesu anena paññā suṭṭhu carāpitā hotīti attho. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo diṭṭhippattoti vuccati. Ayañhi diṭṭhantaṃ patto. ‘‘Dukkhā saṅkhārā, sukho nirodho’’ti ñāṇaṃ hoti . Diṭṭhaṃ viditaṃ sacchikataṃ passitaṃ paññāyāti diṭṭhappatto. Ayampi kāyasakkhī viya chabbidhova hoti.
28 28. 关于信解脱者的解释——“但不像见至者那样”,意思是:见至者的诸漏已经灭尽,而信解脱者并非如此。那么,他们在断除烦恼方面有差别吗?没有。那为什么信解脱者达不到见至者的程度呢?因为入道的方式不同。见至者在入道时镇伏烦恼,能以较少的苦、较少的困难,毫不费力地就镇伏烦恼。而信解脱者则要经历苦、经历困难、疲惫不堪,才能镇伏烦恼,所以达不到见至者的程度。此外,他们的智慧也有差别。见至者对于上三道,其观智锐利、勇猛、明净地运作;信解脱者的观智则不锐利、不勇猛、不明净地运作,因此他也达不到见至者的程度。巴利 注疏 1
28. Saddhāvimuttaniddese – no ca kho yathā diṭṭhippattassāti yathā diṭṭhippattassa āsavā parikkhīṇā, na evaṃ saddhāvimuttassāti attho. Kiṃ pana nesaṃ kilesappahāne nānattaṃ atthīti? Natthi. Atha kasmā saddhāvimutto diṭṭhippattaṃ na pāpuṇātīti? Āgamanīyanānattena. Diṭṭhippato hi āgamanamhi kilese vikkhambhento appadukkhena appakasirena akilamantova vikkhambhetuṃ sakkoti. Saddhāvimutto pana dukkhena kasirena kilamanto hutvā vikkhambhetuṃ sakkoti, tasmā diṭṭhippattaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Apica nesaṃ paññāyapi nānattaṃ atthiyeva. Diṭṭhippattassa hi upari tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ tikkhaṃ sūraṃ pasannaṃ hutvā vahati. Saddhāvimuttassa vipassanāñāṇaṃ no tikkhaṃ sūraṃ pasannaṃ hutvā vahati, tasmāpi so diṭṭhippattaṃ na pāpuṇāti.
就像两个年轻人展示技艺时,一个人手里拿的是锋利的剑,另一个人拿的是钝剑。用锋利的剑砍芭蕉树,不会发出声音;用钝剑砍芭蕉树,就会发出“嘎吱嘎吱”的声音。在这里,用利剑砍芭蕉树而不出声,就好比见至者对于三道(须陀洹道、斯陀含道、阿那含道)的观智,具有锐利、勇猛、明净的状态;用钝剑砍芭蕉树而发出声音,就好比信解脱者对于三道的观智,应当知道是不锐利、不勇猛、不明净的状态。不过,这个理路被否定之后,结论仍然是:正是因为入道方式的差异,信解脱者才达不到见至者的境地。巴利
Yathā hi dvīsu taruṇesu sippaṃ dassentesu ekassa hatthe tikhiṇo asi, ekassa kuṇṭho. Tikhiṇena asinā kadalī chijjamānā saddaṃ na karoti. Kuṇṭhena asinā chijjamānā ‘kaṭakaṭā’ti saddaṃ karoti. Tattha tikhiṇena asinā saddaṃ akarontiyā eva kadaliyā chedanaṃ viya diṭṭhippattassa tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vipassanāñāṇassa tikhiṇasūravippasannabhāvo. Kuṇṭhena asinā saddaṃ karontiyāpi kadaliyā chedanaṃ viya saddhāvimuttassa tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vipassanāñāṇassa atikhiṇaasūraappasannabhāvo veditabbo. Imaṃ pana nayaṃ ‘no’ti paṭikkhipitvā, āgamanīyanānatteneva saddhāvimutto diṭṭhippattaṃ na pāpuṇātīti sanniṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ.
不过在诸义注中这样说:在这两类人当中,信解脱者在前期道的那一刻,就像是在相信、认可、信解的同时,烦恼就灭尽了。见至者在前期道的那一刻,断除烦恼的智慧不迟钝,锐利、勇猛、迅速地运作。因此,就像有人用极其钝的刀砍芭蕉树,砍断的地方并不平整,刀走得也不快,还能听到声音,必须用更大的力气;信解脱者的前期道修习就是这样。又像有人用磨得极好的刀砍芭蕉树,砍断的地方平整,刀走得快,听不到声音,不需要费很大力气;应当知道,见至者的前期道修习就是这样。这一个人就叫做信解脱者。因为他以信而解脱,所以叫信解脱者。此人也像身证者一样,共有六种。巴利
Āgamaṭṭhakathāsu pana vuttaṃ – ‘‘etesu hi saddhāvimuttassa pubbabhāgamaggakkhaṇe saddahantassa viya okappentassa viya adhimuccantassa viya ca kilesakkhayo hoti. Diṭṭhippattassa pubbabhāgamaggakkhaṇe kilesacchedakañāṇaṃ adandhaṃ tikhiṇaṃ sūraṃ hutvā vahati. Tasmā yathā nāma atikhiṇena asinā kadaliṃ chindantassa chinnaṭṭhānaṃ na maṭṭhaṃ hoti, asi na sīghaṃ vahati, saddo suyyati, balavataro vāyāmo kātabbo hoti ; evarūpā saddhāvimuttassa pubbabhāgamaggabhāvanā. Yathā pana sunisiteneva asinā kadaliṃ chindantassa chinnaṭṭhānaṃ maṭṭhaṃ hoti, asi sīghaṃ vahati, saddo na suyyati, balavavāyāmakiccaṃ na hoti; evarūpā diṭṭhippattassa pubbabhāgamaggabhāvanā veditabbā’’ti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo saddhāvimuttoti vuccati. Ayañhi saddahanto vimuttoti saddhāvimutto. Ayampi kāyasakkhī viya chabbidhova hoti.
29 在随法行者的解说中,已行道者这个说法,是用来显示处于入流道的人。增上指强而有力。运载慧,就是运载慧。也可以说:慧运载这个人,所以叫慧运载者。以慧为先导,就是把慧放在前面。被称为,就是说这一类人被称为随法行者。因为他随行、随顺那称为慧的法,所以是随法行者。这只是处于入流道者的名称。证得果的时候,就称为见至者。巴利 注疏 1
29. Dhammānusārīniddese – paṭipannassāti iminā sotāpattimaggaṭṭho dassito. Adhimattanti balavaṃ. Paññaṃ vāhetīti paññāvāhī. Paññā imaṃ puggalaṃ vahatīti paññāvāhītipi vuttaṃ hoti. Paññāpubbaṅgamanti paññaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo dhammānusārīti vuccati. So hi paññāsaṅkhātena dhammena sarati anussaratīti dhammānusārī. Sotāpattimaggaṭṭhassevetaṃ nāmaṃ. Phale pana patte diṭṭhippatto nāma hoti.
30 在随信行的解说中,“以信运载”就是信运载者。也可以说:信运载这个人,所以叫信运载者。“信为先导”就是把信放在前面引导。所谓“这个人被称为”,就是说这样类型的人被称为随信行者。因为他以信而随念、随忆念,所以叫随信行者。这只是入流道位者的名称。但证得果位时,就叫信解脱者。对于生起出世间法的人来说,有两种承担、两种倾向、两种顶点。其中,信承担和慧承担,称为两种承担。一位比丘以止的倾向而倾向,另一位以观的倾向而倾向——这就是两种倾向。一位达到顶点时成为俱分解脱者,另一位成为慧解脱者——这就是两种顶点。凡是生起出世间法的人,全都以这两种法为承担,在这两处倾向之后,从这两处得到解脱。其中,有一位证得八等至的比丘,以慧为承担,依止而倾向,以某一无色等至为所缘,修观而证得阿罗汉,他在入流道刹那叫法随行者。此后在六个阶段叫身证者。证得阿罗汉果时,叫俱分解脱者。巴利
30. Saddhānusārīniddesepi – saddhaṃ vāhetīti saddhāvāhī. Saddhā imaṃ puggalaṃ vahatīti saddhāvāhītipi vuttameva. Saddhāpubbaṅgamanti saddhaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo saddhānusārīti vuccati. So hi saddhāya sarati. Anussaratīti saddhānusārī. Sotāpattimaggaṭṭhassevetaṃ nāmaṃ. Phale pana patte saddhāvimutto nāma hoti. Lokuttaradhammañhi nibbattentānaṃ dve dhurāni nāma, dve abhinivesā nāma, dve sīsāni nāma. Tattha saddhādhuraṃ paññādhuranti – dve dhurāni nāma. Eko pana bhikkhu samathābhinivesena abhinivisati, eko vipassanābhinivesenāti – ime dve abhinivesā nāma. Eko ca matthakaṃ pāpuṇanto ubhatobhāgavimutto hoti, eko paññāvimuttoti – imāni dve sīsāni nāma. Ye keci hi lokuttaradhammaṃ nibbattenti, sabbe te ime dve dhamme dhuraṃ katvā imesu dvīsu ṭhānesu abhinivisitvā imehi dvīhi ṭhānehi vimuccanti. Tesu yo bhikkhu aṭṭhasamāpattilābhī paññaṃ dhuraṃ katvā samathavasena abhiniviṭṭho aññataraṃ arūpasamāpattiṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, so sotāpattimaggakkhaṇe dhammānusārī nāma. Parato pana chasu ṭhānesu kāyasakkhī nāma. Arahattaphale patte ubhatobhāgavimutto nāma.
还有另一种人,只把慧当作首要的,依观的力量而深入,对纯粹的行蕴或色界诸禅中的某一种加以观照之后,证得阿罗汉果。这种人在入流道那一刹那,就叫作法随行者。之后在六个阶位中,叫见至者。证到阿罗汉果时,叫慧解脱者。这里有两个新名称,加上前面的三个,就成了五个。
还有另一种人,证得八种等至,把信当作首要的,依定的力量而深入,以某一种无色等至作为所依,建立观之后,证得阿罗汉果——这种人在入流道那一刹那,就叫作随信行者。之后在六个阶位中,就叫作身证者。证到阿罗汉果时,就叫作俱分解脱者。这里只有一个新名称,加上前面的五个,就成了六个。
还有另一种人,只把信当作首要的,依观的力量而深入,对纯粹的行蕴或色界诸禅中的某一种加以观照之后,证得阿罗汉果。这种人在入流道那一刹那,也叫作随信行者。之后在六个阶位中,叫作信解脱者。证到阿罗汉果时,叫作慧解脱者。这里也只有一个新名称,加上前面的六个,就成了七个。
这七种人,在世间被称为最上应供者。巴利
Aparo paññameva dhuraṃ katvā vipassanāvasena abhiniviṭṭho suddhasaṅkhāre vā rūpāvacarajjhānesu vā aññataraṃ sammasitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, ayampi sotāpattimaggakkhaṇeyeva dhammānusārī nāma. Parato pana chasu ṭhānesu diṭṭhippatto nāma. Arahatte patte paññāvimutto nāma. Idha dve nāmāni apubbāni, tāni purimehi saddhiṃ pañca honti. Aparo aṭṭhasamāpattilābhī saddhaṃ dhuraṃ katvā samādhivasena abhiniviṭṭho aññataraṃ arūpasamāpattiṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti – ayaṃ sotāpattimaggakkhaṇe saddhānusārī nāma. Parato chasu ṭhānesu kāyasakkhīyeva nāma. Arahatte patte ubhatobhāgavimuttoyeva nāma. Idha ekameva nāmaṃ apubbaṃ. Tena saddhiṃ purimāni pañca cha honti. Aparo saddhameva dhuraṃ katvā vipassanāvasena abhiniviṭṭho suddhasaṅkhāre vā rūpāvacarajjhānesu vā aññataraṃ sammasitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Ayampi sotāpattimaggakkhaṇe saddhānusārī nāma. Parato chasu ṭhānesu saddhāvimutto nāma. Arahatte patte paññāvimutto nāma. Idhāpi ekameva nāmaṃ apubbaṃ. Tena saddhiṃ purimāni cha satta honti. Ime satta puggalā loke aggadakkhiṇeyyā nāmāti.
31 在“最多七次往返”的解说中,“七次”就是七个来回。“最多七次往返”是说他的轮回受生、取得生命最多只有七次,从此以后不再领受第八次生命,所以叫“最多七次往返”。所谓“入流者”,这里的“流”指圣道,具足这条圣道的人就叫“入流者”。正如经文所说——巴利 注疏 1
31. Sattakkhattuparamaniddese – sattakkhattunti sattavāre. Sattakkhattuparamā bhavūpapatti attabhāvaggahaṇaṃ assa, tato paraṃ aṭṭhamaṃ bhavaṃ nādiyatīti sattakkhattuparamo. Sotāpanno hotīti ettha sototi ariyamaggo, tena samannāgato sotāpanno nāma. Yathāha –
“流,流”,舍利弗,这被称为流。舍利弗,什么是流呢?尊者,这圣八支道就是流,也就是:正见……正定。“入流者,入流者”,舍利弗,这被称为入流者。舍利弗,什么是入流者呢?尊者,凡是具足这圣八支道的人,就称为入流者,也就是这位具如是名、如是姓的尊者。巴利
‘‘Soto sototi hidaṃ, sāriputta, vuccati. Katamo nu kho, sāriputta, sototi? Ayameva hi, bhante, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo soto, seyyathidaṃ – sammādiṭṭhi…pe… sammāsamādhīti. Sotāpanno sotāpannoti, hidaṃ, sāriputta, vuccati. Katamo nu kho, sāriputta, sotāpannoti? Yo hi, bhante, iminā ariyena aṭṭhaṅgikena maggena samannāgato ayaṃ vuccati sotāpanno, svāyaṃ āyasmā evaṃnāmo evaṃgotto iti vā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1001).
这样,即使在道的刹那,也可以叫入流者。不过这里是由道而给果立名,所以指的是在果的刹那的入流者。巴利
Evaṃ maggakkhaṇepi sotāpanno nāma hoti. Idha pana maggena phalassa nāmaṃ dinnanti phalakkhaṇe sotāpanno adhippeto.
不退堕法,是指不再以转生的方式投生到称为恶趣的堕处,这就是它的本性。决定,是指依道的决定而得决定。以正觉为归宿,是指以觉悟为最终归宿。他因为已证得的道而觉悟,所以叫以正觉为归宿;又因为凭上面那三道必定会觉悟,所以叫以正觉为归宿。于天及人中,是指天界和人界。流转轮回后,是指以结生的方式一再转生。作苦的尽头,是指把轮回之苦做到边际、做到终结。这被称为,是说这样的人就叫作极七返。不过应当知道,这是就他时而在天界、时而在人界,以杂有之有的方式来说的。巴利
Avinipātadhammoti vinipātasaṅkhātaṃ apāyaṃ upapattivasena anāgamanasabhāvo. Niyatoti magganiyāmena niyato. Sambodhiparāyaṇoti bujjhanakabhāvaparāyaṇo. So hi paṭiladdhamaggena bujjhatīti sambodhiparāyaṇo. Upari tīhi maggehi avassaṃ bujjhissatīti sambodhiparāyaṇo. Deve ca manusse cāti devalokañca manussalokañca. Sandhāvitvā saṃsaritvāti paṭisandhivasena aparāparaṃ gantvā. Dukkhassantaṃ karotīti vaṭṭadukkhassa pariyantaṃ parivaṭumaṃ karoti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo sattakkhattuparamo nāma vuccati. Ayaṃ pana kālena devalokassa kālena manussalokassa vasena missakabhavena kathitoti veditabbo.
32 32. 在“家家”的解说中:从一家到另一家,所以叫“家家”。因为从证得入流果开始,就不会再生到低贱的家族中,只会生在大富大贵的家族里,这就是它的含义。“二家或三家”,是就天和人来说,有二有或三有。所以这也是就混杂的有来说的。“二或三”这只是说法上的表达而已。即使流转到第六有,也仍然是“家家”。巴利 注疏 1
32. Kolaṃkolaniddese – kulato kulaṃ gacchatīti kolaṃkolo. Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyato hi paṭṭhāya nīce kule upapatti nāma natthi, mahābhogakulesuyeva nibbattatīti attho. Dve vā tīṇi vā kulānīti devamanussavasena dve vā tayo vā bhave. Iti ayampi missakabhaveneva kathito. Desanāmattameva cetaṃ – ‘dve vā tīṇi vā’ti. Yāva chaṭṭhabhavā saṃsarantopi pana kolaṃkolova hoti.
33 在“一种子”的解说中,已经讲了“蕴种子”。凡是入流者只有一蕴种子、只取一次再生,他就叫“一种子”。“在人间有”在这里只是说法上的表达而已。不过,说“生于天界有”也是可以的。这些名称是世尊按照所取的名称来安立的。达到这个阶段的人叫“极七返”,达到那个阶段的人叫“家家”,达到另一个阶段的人叫“一种子”——世尊就是取了这些名称。但并不是决定地说:这个就是极七返,这个就是家家,这个就是一种子。巴利 注疏 1
33. Ekabījiniddese – khandhabījaṃ nāma kathitaṃ. Yassa hi sotāpannassa ekaṃyeva khandhabījaṃ atthi, ekaṃ attabhāvaggahaṇaṃ, so ekabījī nāma. Mānusakaṃ bhavanti idaṃ panettha desanāmattameva. Devabhavaṃ nibbattetītipi pana vattuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Bhagavatā gahitanāmavaseneva cetāni etesaṃ nāmāni. Ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ gato sattakkhattuparamo nāma hoti, ettakaṃ kolaṃkolo, ettakaṃ ekabījīti bhagavatā etesaṃ nāmaṃ gahitaṃ. Niyamato pana ayaṃ sattakkhattuparamo, ayaṃ kolaṃkolo, ayaṃ ekabījīti natthi.
那么,是谁决定了他们之间的这种差别呢?有些长老说,是前世因缘决定的;有些说是初道决定的;有些说是上三道决定的;有些说是三道的观智决定的。其中,如果主张“前世因缘决定”,就会得出这样的说法:初道的亲依止缘已经造作好了,而上三道却是没有亲依止缘而生起的。如果主张“初道决定”,就会导致上三道毫无意义。如果主张“上三道决定”,就会导致上三道在第八人还未生起时就已经生起了。而“三道的观智决定”这个说法才是合理的。因为如果对上三道的观智强,就成为“一种子者”;比那弱一些的,是“家家者”;再比那弱一些的,是“七次至多者”。巴利
Ko pana tesaṃ etaṃ pabhedaṃ niyametīti? Keci tāva therā ‘pubbahetu niyametī’ti vadanti, keci ‘paṭhamamaggo’, keci ‘upari tayo maggā’, keci ‘tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vipassanā’ti. Tattha ‘pubbahetu niyametī’ti vāde ‘paṭhamamaggassa upanissayo kato nāma hoti, upari tayo maggā nirupanissayā uppannā’ti vacanaṃ āpajjati. ‘Paṭhamamaggo niyametī’ti vāde upari tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ niratthakatā āpajjati. ‘Upari tayo maggā niyamentī’ti vāde ‘aṭṭhamamagge anuppanneyeva upari tayo maggā uppannā’ti āpajjati. ‘Tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vipassanā niyametī’ti vādo pana yujjati. Sace hi upari tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vipassanā balavatī hoti, ekabījī nāma hoti; tato mandatarāya kolaṃkolo; tato mandatarāya sattakkhattuparamoti.
有些人虽然是入流者,却把心投向轮回,喜欢轮回,一次又一次在轮回中打转、出现。比如给孤独长者、毗舍佉近事女、车乘小天子和大车乘小天子、杂色小天子、天王帝释、龙施小天子——这些人就是心向轮回、喜欢轮回,从一开始,在六层天界中净化之后,最后在色究竟天住下,在那里般涅槃。这些人在这里没有被列入。
而且不只是他们。有的人在人间流转七次之后证得阿罗汉果;有的人投生到天界,在天界中一次又一次流转七次之后证得阿罗汉果——这些人在这里也没有被列入。应当知道,这里是依混合有的方式,只取了七次至多者、家家者,以及仅投生人间的单种者。
其中,每一种又按照苦行道等方式分成四类。以信为引导的,有四种七次至多者、四种家家者、四种单种者,一共十二种。如果能够以智慧生起,心想“我要生出出世间法”,这样以智慧为主导,虽然达到七次至多者等状态,但按修行方式来说也还是十二种。应当知道,这里所说的二十四种入流者,是依此处的八种审察而言来说的。巴利
Ekacco hi sotāpanno vaṭṭajjhāsayo hoti, vaṭṭābhirato, punappunaṃ vaṭṭasmiṃyeva vicarati sandissati. Anāthapiṇḍiko seṭṭhi, visākhā upāsikā, cūḷarathamahārathā devaputtā, anekavaṇṇo devaputto, sakko devarājā, nāgadatto devaputtoti ime hi ettakā janā vaṭṭajjhāsayā vaṭṭābhiratā ādito paṭṭhāya cha devaloke sodhetvā akaniṭṭhe ṭhatvā parinibbāyissanti, ime idha na gahitā. Na kevalañcime; yopi manussesuyeva sattakkhattuṃ saṃsaritvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, yopi devaloke nibbatto devesuyeva sattakkhattuṃ aparāparaṃ saṃsaritvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, imepi idha na gahitā. Missakabhavavaseneva panettha sattakkhattuparamakolaṃkolā mānusakabhavanibbattakoyeva ca ekabījī gahitoti veditabbo. Tattha ekeko dukkhāpaṭipadādivasena catubbidhabhāvaṃ āpajjati. Saddhādhureneva cattāro sattakkhattuparamā, cattāro kolaṃkolā, cattāro ekabījinoti dvādasa honti. Sace paññāya sakkā nibbattetuṃ, ‘ahaṃ lokuttaraṃ dhammaṃ nibbattessāmī’ti evaṃ paññaṃ dhuraṃ katvā sattakkhattuparamādibhāvaṃ pattāpi paṭipadāvasena dvādasevāti ime catuvīsati sotāpannā ihaṭṭhakanijjhānikavaseneva imasmiṃ ṭhāne kathitāti veditabbā.
34 34. 关于一来者的解释:依结生而只来一次,所以叫一来者。“只一次”就是仅此一回。“来此世间”这句话,是在五种一来者中排除四种之后,只取其中一种。因为有些人在这世间证得一来果后,就在这世间般涅槃;有些人在这世间证得后,在天界般涅槃;有些人在天界证得后,就在那里般涅槃;有些人在天界证得后,再投生到这世间才般涅槃——这四种在这里都没有被取。而有一种人,在这世间证得后,在天界住满寿命,再投生到这世间才般涅槃——只有这一种在这里被取了,应当这样理解。这里其余应当说明的内容,全都和前面《法集论》注释中“出世善”的解释里所说的一样。那么,这个一来者和“单种者”有什么差别呢?单种者只有一次结生,一来者则有两次结生——这就是它们之间的差别。巴利 注疏 1
34. Sakadāgāminiddese – paṭisandhivasena sakiṃ āgacchatīti sakadāgāmī. Sakidevāti ekavāraṃyeva. Imaṃ lokaṃ āgantvāti iminā pañcasu sakadāgāmīsu cattāro vajjetvā ekova gahito. Ekacco hi idha sakadāgāmiphalaṃ patvā idheva parinibbāyati, ekacco idha patvā devaloke parinibbāyati, ekacco devaloke patvā tattheva parinibbāyati, ekacco devaloke patvā idhūpapajjitvā parinibbāyati – ime cattāropi idha na gahitā. Yo pana idha patvā devaloke yāvatāyukaṃ vasitvā puna idhūpapajjitvā parinibbāyati – ayaṃ ekova idha gahitoti veditabbo. Sesamettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā taṃ sabbaṃ heṭṭhā dhammasaṅgahaṭṭhakathāyaṃ lokuttarakusalaniddese vuttameva. Imassa pana sakadāgāmino ekabījinā saddhiṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇanti? Ekabījissa ekāva paṭisandhi, sakadāgāmissa dve paṭisandhiyo – idaṃ nesaṃ nānākaraṇanti.
35 35. 关于不还者的释义——“下分结”中,“下”指的是欲界。如果有人这五种束缚还没有断除,那么即使他转生到有顶天,也会像吞了钩的鱼、脚上绑了长绳的乌鸦一样,被这些束缚拖拽着,仍然只在欲界里流转。所以这五种束缚就叫“下分结”。意思是属于下方、属于下面那一部分的。“遍尽”是指这些束缚的彻底断尽。“化生者”是指化生类。由此排除其胎生。“在那里般涅槃”是指在那里,在净居天世界中般涅槃。“不再从那个世间返回”是指因为结生的缘故,从那个世间不再返回到这里,其本性是不再返回。然而,为了见佛、见长老、听法而前来,则不受阻碍。所谓“此即名为”——如此这般的人,因为依结生而不再返回,所以名为“不还者”。巴利
35. Anāgāminiddese – orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānanti oraṃ vuccati kāmadhātu. Yassa imāni pañca bandhanāni appahīnāni honti, so bhavagge nibbattopi gilitabaḷiso maccho viya dīghasuttakena pāde baddhakāko viya tehi bandhanehi ākaḍḍhiyamāno kāmadhātuyaṃyeva pavattatīti pañca bandhanāni orambhāgiyānīti vuccanti. Heṭṭhābhāgiyāni heṭṭhākoṭṭhāsikānīti attho. Parikkhayāti tesaṃ bandhanānaṃ parikkhayena. Opapātikoti upapātayoniko. Imināssa gabbhaseyyā paṭikkhittā. Tattha parinibbāyīti tattha suddhāvāsaloke parinibbāyitā. Anāvattidhammo tasmā lokāti paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena tasmā lokā idha anāvattanasabhāvo. Buddhadassanatheradassanadhammassavanānaṃ panatthāyassa āgamanaṃ anivāritaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evaṃvidho puggalo paṭisandhivasena puna anāgamanato anāgāmī nāma vuccati.
36 36. 关于中般涅槃者的释义——“或于结生后随即”是指结生之后立即。“寿命未达中半”是指还没活到寿量的一半时,就生起圣道,这是它的意思。不过,由于“或”这个字的灵活用法,也应该知道有已经活到寿量一半的情况。这样,中般涅槃者就成立为三种。所谓“上分结”,是指五种上分结,或者八种烦恼。为了断除这些,他生起圣道。这被称为——像这样的人,因为在寿命中间就般涅槃,所以称为中般涅槃者。巴利 注疏 1
36. Antarāparinibbāyiniddese – upapannaṃ vā samanantarāti upapannasamanantarā vā hutvā. Appattaṃ vā vemajjhaṃ āyuppamāṇanti āyuppamāṇaṃ vemajjhaṃ appattaṃ vā hutvā ariyamaggaṃ sañjanetīti attho. Vāsaddavikappato pana vemajjhaṃ pattantipi attho veditabbo. Evaṃ tayo antarāparinibbāyino siddhā honti. Upariṭṭhimānaṃ saṃyojanānanti upari pañcannaṃ uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ vā kilesānaṃ. Pahānāyāti etesaṃ pajahanatthāya maggaṃ sañjaneti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo āyuvemajjhassa antarāyeva parinibbāyanato antarāparinibbāyīti vuccati.
37 37. 关于生般涅槃者的解释——“已超过寿量的中间”,就是超过了寿量的一半。“或越过之后才命终”,就是接近命终时才死去。意思是说,已经站在寿命即将耗尽的门槛上。这被称为——这类人先是在无烦天中,寿命长达一千劫,超过那被称为中间点的五百劫之后,在第六百劫、或第七第八第九百劫中的某一劫,或者就在第十百劫时,证得阿罗汉果,以烦恼般涅槃而般涅槃,所以被称为生般涅槃者。巴利 注疏 1
37. Upahaccaparinibbāyiniddese – atikkamitvā vemajjhaṃ āyuppamāṇanti āyuppamāṇaṃ vemajjhaṃ atikkamitvā. Upahacca vā kālakiriyanti upagantvā kālakiriyaṃ. Āyukkhayassa āsanne ṭhatvāti attho. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo avihesu tāva kappasahassappamāṇassa āyuno pañcakappasatasaṅkhātaṃ vemajjhaṃ atikkamitvā chaṭṭhe vā kappasate sattamaṭṭhamanavamānaṃ vā aññatarasmiṃ dasameyeva vā kappasate ṭhatvā arahattaṃ patvā kilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyanato upahaccaparinibbāyīti vuccati.
38 在解释无行般涅槃者和有行般涅槃者时:不靠刻意造作、不靠艰难苦修、不必猛力用功,就通过灭尽烦恼而般涅槃的,就是无行般涅槃者。要靠刻意造作、要受艰难困苦、要猛力用功之后,才通过灭尽烦恼而般涅槃的,就是有行般涅槃者。巴利
38. Asaṅkhārasasaṅkhāraparinibbāyiniddesesu – asaṅkhārena appadukkhena adhimattapayogaṃ akatvāva kilesaparinibbānena parinibbānadhammoti asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī. Sasaṅkhārena dukkhena kasirena adhimattapayogaṃ katvāva kilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyanadhammoti sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī.
40 40. 关于“上流者”的解释:由于有向上流动的状态,他的渴爱之流或轮回之流是向上的,所以叫“上流”。或者,因为要向上走之后才能证得,他的道流是向上的,所以叫“上流”。前往色究竟天的,叫“色究竟天往者”。在“从无烦天死后,前往无热天”等说法中,在无烦天住一千劫,没能证得阿罗汉果,就前往无热天;在那里住二千劫,没能证得阿罗汉果,就前往善见天;在那里住四千劫,没能证得阿罗汉果,就前往善现天;在那里住八千劫,没能证得阿罗汉果,就前往色究竟天。在那里安住而证得圣道,这就是其含义。巴利 注疏 1
40. Uddhaṃsotaniddese – uddhaṃ vāhibhāvena uddhamassa taṇhāsotaṃ vaṭṭasotaṃ vāti uddhaṃsoto. Uddhaṃ vā gantvā paṭilabhitabbato uddhamassa maggasotanti uddhaṃsoto. Akaniṭṭhaṃ gacchatīti akaniṭṭhagāmī. Avihā cuto atappaṃ gacchatītiādīsu avihe kappasahassaṃ vasanto arahattaṃ pattuṃ asakkuṇitvā atappaṃ gacchati. Tatrāpi dve kappasahassāni vasanto arahattaṃ pattuṃ asakkuṇitvā sudassaṃ gacchati. Tatrāpi cattāri kappasahassāni vasanto arahattaṃ pattuṃ asakkuṇitvā sudassiṃ gacchati. Tatrāpi aṭṭha kappasahassāni vasanto arahattaṃ pattuṃ asakkuṇitvā akaniṭṭhaṃ gacchati. Tattha vasanto ariyamaggaṃ sañjanetīti attho.
不过,为了了解这些不还者的分类,应当知道“上流者、往色究竟天者”的四种组合。其中,从无烦天开始,依次经过四个天界,最后到达色究竟天才般涅槃的,这叫“上流者,也是往色究竟天者”。如果经过下方三个天界,住在善现天就般涅槃的,这叫“上流者,但不是往色究竟天者”。如果从此界直接前往色究竟天才般涅槃的,这叫“不是上流者,而是往色究竟天者”。如果在下方四个天界中,随处投生就随处般涅槃的,这叫“不是上流者,也不是往色究竟天者”。这样,这些不还者共有四十八种。巴利
Imesaṃ pana anāgāmīnaṃ pabhedajānanatthaṃ uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmīcatukkaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha yo avihato paṭṭhāya cattāro devaloke sodhetvā akaniṭṭhaṃ gantvā parinibbāyati ayaṃ uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo pana heṭṭhā tayo devaloke sodhetvā sudassīdevaloke ṭhatvā parinibbāyati – ayaṃ uddhaṃsoto, na akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma . Yo pana ito akaniṭṭhameva gantvā parinibbāyati, ayaṃ na uddhaṃsoto, akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma . Yo pana heṭṭhā catūsu devalokesu tattha tattheva parinibbāyati, ayaṃ na uddhaṃsoto, na akaniṭṭhagāmī nāmāti. Evamete aṭṭhacattālīsa anāgāmino honti.
怎么算呢?在无烦天,先说有三位中般涅槃者、一位生般涅槃者、一位上流者,这样无行般涅槃者五位,有行般涅槃者五位,共十位。同样,在无热天、善见天、善现天,各有十位,共四十位。但在色究竟天,没有上流者,只有三位中般涅槃者、一位生般涅槃者,无行般涅槃者四位,有行般涅槃者四位,共八位。这样合计就是五十八位。巴利
Kathaṃ? Avihe tāva tayo antarāparinibbāyino, eko upahaccaparinibbāyī, eko uddhaṃsoto te asaṅkhāraparinibbāyino pañca, sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyino pañcāti dasa honti. Tathā atappāsudassāsudassīsūti cattāro dasakā cattālīsaṃ. Akaniṭṭhe pana uddhaṃsoto natthi. Tayo pana antarāparinibbāyino, eko upahaccaparinibbāyī. Te asaṅkhāraparinibbāyino cattāro, sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyino cattāroti aṭṭha. Evaṃ aṭṭhacattālīsaṃ honti.
他们全部都用火花来比喻说明。比如在晒了一整天的铁砧上锤打时,飞溅出的铁屑、铁片、铁钉屑迸出火花,那火花刚一冒出就熄灭了——应当知道,第一种中般涅槃者就是这样。为什么呢?因为他刚一往生,就立刻以烦恼的般涅槃而般涅槃。在更大的铁砧上锤打时,火花迸出后腾跃到空中才熄灭——应当知道,第二种中般涅槃者就是这样。为什么呢?因为他还没到达中间就般涅槃了。在更大的铁砧上锤打时,火花迸出后腾跃到空中,又折返回来,没有碰到地面就熄灭了——应当知道,第三种中般涅槃者就是这样。为什么呢?因为他到了中间,但没有触及就般涅槃了。在更大的铁砧上锤打时,火花迸出后腾跃到空中,落在地上,碰到地面才熄灭——应当知道,这是接触般涅槃者。为什么呢?因为他已接近命终,耗尽寿行才般涅槃。在更大的铁砧上锤打时,火花落在少量草木上,烧尽那少量草木后熄灭——应当知道,这是无行般涅槃者。为什么呢?因为他以很少的功用、轻快地趣向而般涅槃。在更大的铁砧上锤打时,火花落在大量草木堆上,烧尽那大量草木堆后熄灭——应当知道,这是有行般涅槃者。为什么呢?因为他以有功用、不轻快地趣向而般涅槃。还有一种情况:火花落在大草木堆中,当那大草木堆燃烧时,炽热的炭火或火焰飞溅出来,烧掉铁匠铺,烧掉村庄、集镇、城市、国土,一直烧到海边才熄灭——应当知道,这是上流者,趣向色究竟天。为什么呢?因为他一次次触及诸多有之种子并使之消散,然后般涅槃。然而,因为无论铁屑、铁片等种种差别,小的也好大的也好,都只是铁盘,所以经中在一切处都只说“铁盘”。正如经中所说——巴利
Te sabbepi papaṭikopamāya dīpitā – divasaṃ santattānampi hi ārakaṇṭakavipphalikanakhacchedanānaṃ ayomukhe haññamāne papaṭikā uppajjitvāva nibbāyati – evarūpo paṭhamo antarāparinibbāyī veditabbo. Kasmā? Uppannasamanantarāva kilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyanato. Tato mahantatare ayomukhe haññamāne papaṭikā ākāsaṃ ullaṅghitvā nibbāyati – evarūpo dutiyo antarāparinibbāyī daṭṭhabbo. Kasmā? Vemajjhaṃ appatvā parinibbāyanato. Tato mahantatare ayomukhe haññamāne papaṭikā ākāsaṃ ullaṅghitvā nivattamānā pathaviyaṃ anupahaccatalā hutvā parinibbāyati – evarūpo tatiyo antarāparinibbāyī daṭṭhabbo. Kasmā? Vemajjhaṃ patvā anupahacca parinibbāyanato. Tato mahantatare ayomukhe haññamāne papaṭikā ākāsaṃ ullaṅghitvā pathaviyaṃ patitvā upahaccatalā hutvā nibbāyati – evarūpo upahaccaparinibbāyī veditabbo. Kasmā? Kālakiriyaṃ upagantvā āyugatiṃ khepetvā parinibbāyanato. Tato mahantatare ayomukhe haññamāne papaṭikā paritte tiṇakaṭṭhe patitvā taṃ parittaṃ tiṇakaṭṭhaṃ jhāpetvā nibbāyati – evarūpo asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī veditabbo. Kasmā? Appayogena lahusāya gatiyā parinibbāyanato. Tato mahantatare ayomukhe haññamāne papaṭikā vipule tiṇakaṭṭhapuñje patitvā taṃ vipulaṃ tiṇakaṭṭhapuñjaṃ jhāpetvā nibbāyati – evarūpo sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī veditabbo. Kasmā? Sappayogena alahusāya gatiyā parinibbāyanato. Aparā mahantesu tiṇakaṭṭhapuñjesu patati, tattha mahantesu tiṇakaṭṭhapuñjesu jhāyamānesu vītaccitaṅgāro vā jālā vā uppatitvā kammārasālaṃ jhāpetvā gāmanigamanagararaṭṭhaṃ jhāpetvā samuddantaṃ patvā nibbāyati – evarūpo uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī daṭṭhabbo. Kasmā? Anekabhavabījavipphāraṃ phussa phussa byantīkatvā parinibbāyanato. Yasmā pana ārakaṇṭakādibhedaṃ khuddakampi mahantampi ayokapālameva, tasmā sutte sabbavāresu ayokapālantveva vuttaṃ (a. ni. 7.55). Yathāha –
比丘们,在这里,一位比丘这样修行:“如果我不存在,我所拥有的也不存在;我将不存在,我所拥有的也将不存在。凡是存在的、凡是已生成的,我都舍弃。”他获得舍。他不贪著于有,不贪著于生起,以正慧照见那最上寂静的境界。然而,他还没有完全证得那个境界,还没有彻底断除慢随眠、有贪随眠、无明随眠。他因为五下分结的灭尽,成为中般涅槃者。比丘们,就像在烈日晒热的铁板上锤打时,迸出的火星随即熄灭;同样地,比丘们,一位比丘这样修行:“如果我不存在……”乃至……成为中般涅槃者。巴利
‘‘Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – ‘no cassa, no ca me siyā, na bhavissati, na me bhavissati, yadatthi yaṃ bhūtaṃ, taṃ pajahāmī’’’ti upekkhaṃ paṭilabhati. So bhave na rajjati, sambhave na rajjati, atthuttari padaṃ santaṃ sammappaññāya passati. Tañca khvassa padaṃ na sabbena sabbaṃ sacchikataṃ hoti. Tassa na sabbena sabbaṃ mānānusayo pahīno hoti, na sabbena sabbaṃ bhavarāgānusayo pahīno hoti, na sabbena sabbaṃ avijjānusayo pahīno hoti. So pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā antarāparinibbāyī hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, divasaṃ santatte ayokapāle haññamāne papaṭikā nibbattitvā nibbāyeyya; evameva kho , bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… antarāparinibbāyī hoti.
比丘们,在这里,有一位比丘这样修行:没有我……(中略)……成为中般涅槃者。比丘们,就像一块被加热了一整天的铁锅被锤打时,有火花迸出、跳起然后熄灭;同样地,比丘们,有一位比丘这样修行:没有我……(中略)……成为中般涅槃者。巴利
‘‘Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… antarāparinibbāyī hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, divasaṃ santatte ayokapāle haññamāne papaṭikā nibbattitvā uppatitvā nibbāyeyya; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… antarāparinibbāyī hoti.
比丘们,在这里,有一位比丘这样修行——没有……(中略)……成为中般涅槃者。比丘们,就像在烈日晒热的铁砧上锤打时,有火花迸出,跳起来后还没碰到铁砧面就熄灭了;同样地,比丘们,有一位比丘这样修行——没有……(中略)……成为中般涅槃者。巴利
‘‘Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… antarāparinibbāyī hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, divasaṃ santatte ayokapāle haññamāne papaṭikā nibbattitvā uppatitvā anupahacca talaṃ nibbāyeyya; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… antarāparinibbāyī hoti.
比丘们,在这里,有一位比丘这样修行——他没有……(中略)……成为触地般涅槃者。比丘们,就像一口被加热了一整天的铁锅被锤打时,有火星迸出,跳起来后碰到锅底就熄灭了;同样地,比丘们,有一位比丘这样修行——他没有……(中略)……成为触地般涅槃者。巴利
‘‘Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… upahaccaparinibbāyī hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, divasaṃ santatte ayokapāle haññamāne papaṭikā nibbattitvā uppatitvā upahacca talaṃ nibbāyeyya; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… upahaccaparinibbāyī hoti.
比丘们,在这里,有一位比丘这样修行——他没有……(中略)……由于灭尽而成为无行般涅槃者。比丘们,就像白天被烧热的铁板上敲打时,火星迸发出来,飞溅而起,落在小草丛或小木柴堆上,它在那里生起火,也生出烟,生起烟火之后,把那小草丛或小木柴堆烧尽,然后没有燃料而熄灭。同样地,比丘们,有一位比丘这样修行——他没有……(中略)……由于灭尽而成为无行般涅槃者。巴利
‘‘Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… parikkhayā asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, divasaṃ santatte ayokapāle haññamāne papaṭikā nibbattitvā uppatitvā paritte tiṇapuñje vā kaṭṭhapuñje vā nipateyya, sā tattha aggimpi janeyya, dhūmampi janeyya, aggimpi janetvā dhūmampi janetvā tameva parittaṃ tiṇapuñjaṃ vā kaṭṭhapuñjaṃ vā pariyādiyitvā anāhārā nibbāyeyya; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… parikkhayā asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī hoti.
比丘们,在这里,有一位比丘这样修行——他没有……(中略)……成为有行般涅槃者。比丘们,就像白天被烧热的铁板上敲打时,火星迸发飞起,落在一大堆草或一大堆木柴上,它在那里生起火……(中略)……把那大堆草或大堆木柴烧尽之后,没有燃料便熄灭了。同样地,比丘们,有一位比丘这样修行——他没有……(中略)……成为有行般涅槃者。巴利
‘‘Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, divasaṃ santatte ayokapāle haññamāne papaṭikā nibbattitvā uppatitvā vipule tiṇapuñje vā kaṭṭhapuñje vā nipateyya, sā tattha aggimpi janeyya…pe… tameva vipulaṃ tiṇapuñjaṃ vā kaṭṭhapuñjaṃ vā pariyādiyitvā anāhārā nibbāyeyya; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī hoti.
比丘们,在这里,有一位比丘这样修行——他没有……(中略)……由于灭尽,成为上流者,趋向色究竟天。比丘们,就像白天被烧热的铁板被敲打时,火星迸发飞起,落在一大堆草或一大堆木柴上,它在那里生起火……(中略)……把那大堆草或大堆木柴烧尽之后,又烧到草丛,又烧到树林,烧过草丛、烧过树林之后,遇到翠绿的地带、道路、岩石、水边或悦意的地面,便没有燃料而熄灭了。同样地,比丘们,有一位比丘这样修行——他没有……(中略)……由于灭尽,成为上流者,趋向色究竟天。巴利
‘‘Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… parikkhayā uddhaṃsoto hoti akaniṭṭhagāmī. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, divasaṃ santatte ayokapāle haññamāne papaṭikā nibbattitvā uppatitvā mahante tiṇapuñje vā kaṭṭhapuñje vā nipateyya, sā tattha aggimpi janeyya…pe… tameva mahantaṃ tiṇapuñjaṃ vā kaṭṭhapuñjaṃ vā pariyādiyitvā gacchampi daheyya, dāyampi daheyya , gacchampi dahitvā dāyampi dahitvā haritantaṃ vā pathantaṃ vā selantaṃ vā udakantaṃ vā ramaṇīyaṃ vā bhūmibhāgaṃ āgamma anāhārā nibbāyeyya; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṃ paṭipanno hoti – no cassa…pe… parikkhayā uddhaṃsoto hoti akaniṭṭhagāmī’’ti (a. ni. 7.55).
41-44 41-44. 关于为现证入流果而修行等的解说,意思已经很明白。这里说“此人称为阿拉汉”,应当知道有十二种阿拉汉。怎么讲呢?因为有三种解脱:空解脱、无相解脱、无愿解脱。其中,通过空解脱而解脱的漏尽者,按修行方式分为四种;同样,通过无相解脱和无愿解脱而解脱的也各有四种——这样应当知道有十二种阿拉汉。就像这十二种阿拉汉一样,同样有十二种一来者、二十四种入流者、四十八种不还者。这些众生从那里解脱后,不再投生到外道中去,只会在一切知佛陀的教法中投生。巴利
41-44. Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipannādiniddesā uttānatthāva. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo arahāti ettha pana dvādasa arahanto veditabbā. Kathaṃ? Tayo hi vimokkhā – suññato, animitto, appaṇihitoti. Tattha suññatavimokkhena vimuttakhīṇāsavo paṭipadāvasena catubbidho hoti; tathā animittaappaṇihitavimokkhehīti – evaṃ dvādasa arahanto veditabbā. Iti ime dvādasa arahanto viya dvādaseva sakadāgāmino, catuvīsati sotāpannā, aṭṭhacattālīsa anāgāminoti ettakā puggalā ito muccitvā bahiddhā nuppajjanti, imasmiññeva sabbaññubuddhasāsane uppajjantīti.
二法解说的注释巴利
2. Dukaniddesavaṇṇanā
45 45. 在二法解说中,“忿怒者”是指有易怒性格、大忿怒的人。像这样问过那人之后,为了如法地指出那人,就说“其中,什么是忿怒?”等等。在怨恨等的解说中,也是同样的方法。“忿怒、恼怒”等词,就是上面已经说过的意思。同样,在怨恨等解说中,“先前的忿怒”等词也是如此。“此忿怒未断”是说,这种程度的忿怒,没有被镇伏断、彼分断或正断所断除。对于后面的怨恨等,也是同样的方法。巴利
45. Dukaniddese kodhanoti kujjhanasīlo mahākodho. Evaṃ puggalaṃ pucchitvāpi dhammena puggalaṃ dassetuṃ tattha katamo kodhotiādimāha. Upanāhīniddesādīsupi eseva nayo. Kodho kujjhanātiādīni heṭṭhā vuttatthāneva. Tathā upanāhīniddesādīsu pubbakālaṃ kodhotiādīni. Ayaṃ kodho appahīnoti ayaṃ ettako kodho vikkhambhanappahānena vā tadaṅgappahānena vā samucchedappahānena vā appahīno. Parato upanāhādīsupi eseva nayo.
53 53. 在“无惭”等的解说中,“以此无惭”是指具足了这种类型的无惭法。“以此无愧”等解说,也同样是这个道理。巴利
53. Ahirikaniddesādīsu – iminā ahirikenāti iminā evaṃpakārena ahirikadhammena samannāgato. Iminā anottappenātiādīsupi eseva nayo.
63 63. “内结”是指被内在的束缚绑住。“外结”是指被外在的束缚绑住。这两者都应该用牛犊舍的比喻来说明。在牛犊舍里,被绑在里面、也睡在里面的牛犊,就像住在这里的入流者和一来者。因为他们的束缚就在这里,他们自己也就在这里。被绑在里面、却睡在外面的牛犊,就像投生在色界、无色界的入流者和一来者。因为他们的束缚虽然在这里,但他们自己却住在梵天界。被绑在外面、也睡在外面的牛犊,就像投生在色界、无色界的不来者。因为他的束缚在外面,他自己也在外面。被绑在外面、却睡在里面的牛犊,就像住在这里的不来者。因为他的束缚在色界、无色界,但他自己却住在这里。巴利 注疏 1
63.Ajjhattasaṃyojanoti ajjhattabandhano. Bahiddhāsaṃyojanoti bahiddhābandhano. Te ubhopi vacchakasālūpamāya dīpetabbā. Vacchakasālāya hi anto baddho antoyeva sayitavacchako viya idhaṭṭhakasotāpannasakadāgāmino. Tesañhi bandhanampi idheva, sayampi idheva. Anto baddho pana bahi sayitavacchako viya rūpārūpabhave sotāpannasakadāgāmino. Tesañhi bandhanameva idha, sayaṃ pana brahmaloke ṭhitā. Bahi baddho bahi sayitavacchako viya rūpārūpabhave anāgāmī. Tassa hi bandhanampi bahiddhā, sayampi bahiddhāva. Bahi baddho pana antosayitavacchako viya idhaṭṭhakaanāgāmī. Tassa hi bandhanaṃ rūpārūpabhavesu, sayaṃ pana idha ṭhito.
65 在“无忿怒者”等解说中,“已断”是指通过镇伏断、彼分断或正断而断除。巴利
65. Akkodhananiddesādīsu – pahīnoti vikkhambhanappahānena vā, tadaṅgappahānena vā, samucchedappahānena vā pahīno.
83 在“难得者”的解说中——“难得”就是不容易得到。“先作者”指最先付出的人。“知恩者”指知道别人为自己做了什么,并且让这份恩情被清楚知道、彰显出来。这要通过在家者和出家者两方面来说明。在在家者当中,父母就是所谓的先作者;而子女照顾父母,对他们行礼问讯等,就是所谓的知恩者。在出家者当中,戒师和依止师就是所谓的先作者;弟子和共住者照顾戒师和依止师,对他们行礼问讯等,就是所谓的知恩者。为了说明这一点,应当讲述奉养依止师的索纳长老等人的故事。巴利 注疏 1
83. Dullabhaniddese – dullabhāti na sulabhā. Pubbakārīti paṭhamameva kārako. Katavedīti kataṃ vedeti, viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ karoti. Te agāriyānagāriyehi dīpetabbā. Agāriyesu hi mātāpitaro pubbakārino nāma. Puttadhītaro pana mātāpitaro paṭijaggantā abhivādanādīni tesaṃ kurumānā katavedino nāma. Anagāriyesu ācariyupajjhāyā pubbakārino nāma. Antevāsikasaddhivihārikā ācariyupajjhāye paṭijaggantā abhivādanādīni tesaṃ kurumānā katavedino nāma. Tesaṃ āvibhāvatthāya upajjhāyaposakasoṇattherādīnaṃ vatthūni kathetabbāni.
还有一种说法:不期待别人对自己有恩,自己先主动去帮助别人,这就是“先施恩的人”,比如父母、老师和依止师。这样的人很难遇到,因为众生都被渴爱压得死死的。别人对自己有恩,能照着那份恩情去行动,把别人给自己的帮助看作恩惠,心里感受到它、明白它,这就是“知恩报恩的人”。比如对父母、老师和依止师能正确地对待和行事。这样的人同样很难遇到,因为众生都被无明压得死死的。巴利
Aparo nayo – parena akateyeva upakāre attani kataṃ upakāraṃ anapekkhitvā kārako pubbakārī, seyyathāpi mātāpitaro ceva ācariyupajjhāyā ca. So dullabho; sattānaṃ taṇhābhibhūtattā. Parena katassa upakārassa anurūpappavattiṃ attani kataṃ upakāraṃ upakārato jānanto, vediyanto, kataññukatavedī. Seyyathāpi mātāpituācariyupajjhāyesu sammā paṭipanno. Sopi dullabho; sattānaṃ avijjābhibhūtattā.
再者——只看付出、不讲条件的慈爱者,是先付出的人;看重对方是否值得、讲究回报的慈爱者,是知恩报恩的人。不期待“他将来会为我做什么”这类理由就去行事的,是先付出的人;期待“他将来会为我做什么”这类理由才去行事的,是知恩报恩的人。以黑暗为归宿的,是先付出的人;以光明为归宿的,是知恩报恩的人。说法的人,是先付出的人;依教修行的人,是知恩报恩的人。在包括天在内的世间里,阿拉汉、正自觉者是先付出的人;圣弟子是知恩报恩的人。不过《双集注》里只这样说:“‘先付出的人’,就是先给对方恩惠的人;‘知恩报恩的人’,就是知道对方为自己做了恩惠之后,再回报恩惠的人。这两种人当中,先付出的人生起‘我在放债’的想法,后回报的人生起‘我在还债’的想法。”巴利
Apica – akāraṇavacchalo pubbakārī, sakāraṇavacchalo kataññukatavedī. ‘Karissati me’ti evamādikāraṇanirapekkhakiriyo pubbakārī. ‘Karissati me’ti evamādikāraṇasāpekkhakiriyo kataññukatavedī. Tamojotiparāyaṇo pubbakārī, jotijotiparāyaṇo kataññukatavedī. Desetā pubbakārī, paṭipajjitā kataññukatavedī. Sadevake loke arahaṃ sammāsambuddho pubbakārī, ariyasāvako kataññukatavedīti. Dukanipātaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.120) pana – ‘‘‘pubbakārī’ti paṭhamaṃ upakārassa kārako, ‘kataññukatavedī’ti tena kataṃ ñatvā pacchā kārako. Tesu pubbakārī iṇaṃ demīti saññaṃ karoti, pacchākārako ‘iṇaṃ jīrāpemī’ti saññaṃ karotī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ.
84 84. 在“难满足者”的解释中——“难满足者”就是无法被满足的人,谁也没办法让他们满足。如果有人住在护持者家或亲戚家,衣服破了,别人给的衣服他放着不用,不穿。一次又一次给了,他也只是收下放着。还有一种人,同样地,得到什么就送出去、给别人。一次又一次得到,也照样这么做。这两种人,就算有人用车把生活用品拉来,也没法让他们满足,所以叫“难满足者”。巴利
84. Duttappayaniddese – duttappayāti atappayā, na sakkā kenaci tappetuṃ. Yo hi upaṭṭhākakulaṃ vā ñātikulaṃ vā nissāya vasamāno cīvare jiṇṇe tehi dinnaṃ cīvaraṃ nikkhipati, na paribhuñjati. Punappunaṃ dinnampi gahetvā nikkhipateva. Yo ca teneva nayena laddhaṃ laddhaṃ vissajjeti parassa deti. Punappunaṃ laddhampi tatheva karoti. Ime dve puggalā sakaṭehipi paccaye upanentena tappetuṃ na sakkāti duttappayā nāma.
85 85. 在“易满足者”的解释中——“不施舍”:就是自己不享用,也不给别人。但如果有多余的,不会放着不管,而是送给别人。这里说的是:如果有比丘从护持者家或亲戚家得到旧衣布料,做成衣服后拿来穿,不会放着不用;即使已经打上补丁穿着了,当别人再次布施时,也不会急忙接受。还有一种人,得到什么就自己用什么,不给别人。这两种人都很容易让他们满足,所以叫易满足者。巴利
85. Sutappayaniddese – na vissajjetīti attano akatvā parassa na deti. Atireke pana sati na nikkhipati parassa deti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yo pana bhikkhu upaṭṭhākakulā vā ñātikulā vā jiṇṇacīvaro sāṭakaṃ labhitvā cīvaraṃ katvā paribhuñjati, na nikkhipati; aggaḷaṃ datvā pārupantopi puna diyyamāne sahasā na paṭiggaṇhāti. Yo ca laddhaṃ laddhaṃ attanā paribhuñjati, paresaṃ na deti. Ime dvepi sukhena sakkā tappetunti sutappayā nāmāti.
86 86. “漏”就是烦恼。对不该后悔的事却后悔,就是“于不应追悔处追悔”。比如得到猪肉,却后悔说“这是熊肉”;得到鹿肉,却后悔说“这是豹肉”。时间明明合适,却后悔说“时间不对”;明明没被邀请,却后悔说“我已经被邀请了”;钵里的尘土明明还没落进去,却后悔说“已经落进去了”;鱼肉明明不是专门为自己做的,却后悔说“是专门为我做的”。对应该后悔的事却不后悔,就是“于应追悔处不追悔”。得到熊肉,却不后悔说“这是猪肉”……鱼肉明明是专门为自己做的,却不后悔说“是专门为我做的”。不过在《增支部注》里只说了这么多:“‘不应追悔’,就是对僧团受用物不加安排、不加审查,这本来不该后悔,他却后悔。‘应追悔’,就是对它加以安排、加以审查,他却不后悔。”对于这些人:这两种人的漏,就像肥沃土地上的蔓草之类,日夜不停地增长。在白分方面,得到如法的肉,就只当作如法的肉来接受,这叫“于不应追悔处不追悔”,应当按这个方法来理解其中的义理。巴利 注疏 1
86.Āsavāti kilesā. Na kukkuccāyitabbaṃ kukkuccāyatīti na kukkuccāyitabbayuttakaṃ kukkuccāyati. Sūkaramaṃsaṃ labhitvā acchamaṃsanti kukkuccāyati, migamaṃsaṃ, labhitvā dīpimaṃsanti kukkuccāyati. Kāle santeyeva ‘kālo natthī’ti, appavāretvāva ‘pavāritosmī’ti, patte rajasmiṃ apatiteyeva ‘patita’nti, attānaṃ uddissa macchamaṃse akateyeva ‘maṃ uddissa kata’nti kukkuccāyati. Kukkuccāyitabbaṃ na kukkuccāyatīti kukkuccāyitabbayuttakaṃ na kukkuccāyati. Acchamaṃsaṃ labhitvā sūkaramaṃsanti na kukkuccāyati…pe… attānaṃ uddissa macchamaṃse kate ‘maṃ uddissa kata’nti na kukkuccāyati . Aṅguttaraṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – ‘‘‘na kukkuccāyitabba’nti saṅghabhogassa apaṭṭhapanaṃ avicāraṇaṃ na kukkuccāyitabbaṃ nāma, taṃ kukkuccāyati. ‘Kukkuccāyitabba’nti tasseva paṭṭhapanaṃ vicāraṇaṃ, taṃ na kukkuccāyatī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Imesanti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ puggalānaṃ subhūmiyaṃ tiṇalatādīni viya rattimpi divāpi āsavā vaḍḍhantiyeva. Sukkapakkhe kappiyamaṃsaṃ labhitvā kappiyamaṃsantveva gaṇhanto na kukkuccāyitabbaṃ na kukkuccāyati nāmāti iminā nayena attho veditabbo.
88 心志低劣,就是志向卑下。戒行恶劣,就是没有戒。恶法,就是低劣的法。巴利
88.Hīnādhimuttoti hīnajjhāsayo. Dussīloti nissīlo. Pāpadhammoti lāmakadhammo.
89 心志殊胜,就是志向高远。善法,就是吉祥的法、清净的法、美好的法。巴利
89.Paṇītādhimuttoti paṇītajjhāsayo. Kalyāṇadhammoti bhaddakadhammo, sucidhammo, sundaradhammo.
90 90.“满足者”指已经吃饱、已经完成的人。“能令人满足者”指也能让其他人满足的人。在独觉佛和如来弟子这一点上:独觉佛靠自己以九种出世间法而满足、圆满,却不能让别人满足,因为他们对别人说法时,别人无法证悟。而弟子说法时,无量天和人却能证悟。即使如此,弟子说法时并不是把自己的话当作依据来说,而是把诸佛的话当作依据来说。坐下来听法的会众也会生起重视之心:“这位比丘不是在说自己证悟的法,而是在说诸佛证悟的法。”这样一来,这份重视就归于诸佛。因此在这种情况下,只有正自觉者才叫作“能令人满足者”。就像国王下令说:“把某某东西给某某人。”虽然是别人拿来给的,但国王才是那里的施主。接受的人也会认为:“是国王给了我们职位,给了我们权势和财富。”而不会认为是国王的侍从给的。应当这样理解其中的道理。其余部分在各处都很容易明白。巴利 注疏 1
90.Tittoti suhito pariyosito. Tappetāti aññesampi tittikaro. Paccekasambuddhā ye ca tathāgatasāvakāti ettha paccekabuddhā navahi lokuttaradhammehi sayaṃ tittā paripuṇṇā. Aññe pana tappetuṃ na sakkonti. Tesañhi dhammakathāya abhisamayo na hoti. Sāvakānaṃ pana dhammakathāya aparimāṇānampi devamanussānaṃ abhisamayo hoti. Evaṃ santepi yasmā pana te dhammaṃ desentā na attano vacanaṃ katvā kathenti, buddhānaṃ vacanaṃ katvā kathenti. Sotuṃ nisinnaparisāpi ‘ayaṃ bhikkhu na attanā paṭividdhadhammaṃ katheti, buddhehi paṭividdhadhammaṃ kathetī’ti cittīkāraṃ karoti. Iti so cittīkāro buddhānaṃyeva hoti. Evaṃ tattha sammāsambuddhova tappetā nāma. Yathā hi ‘asukassa nāma idañcidañca dethā’ti raññā āṇattā kiñcāpi ānetvā denti, atha kho rājāva tattha dāyako. Yehipi laddhaṃ hoti, te ‘raññā amhākaṃ ṭhānantaraṃ dinnaṃ, issariyavibhavo dinno’tveva gaṇhanti, na rājapurisehīti. Evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
三法解说的注释巴利
3. Tikaniddesavaṇṇanā
91 在“三法解说”中:恶戒者,就是没有戒的人。恶法者,就是品性低劣的人。或者,因为戒的毁坏而成为恶戒者,因为见的毁坏而成为恶法者。因为身、语防护的破坏而成为恶戒者,因为其余防护的破坏而成为恶法者。因为行为不清净而成为恶戒者,因为意乐不清净而成为恶法者。因为缺少善戒而成为恶戒者,因为具有不善戒而成为恶法者。不净者,就是具足不净的身业等。令人疑虑的行为,就是让别人对自己生起疑虑而忆念的行为。或者,别人看到某种不合适的事情后,会怀疑“这一定是他做的”,像这样让别人产生怀疑的行为;或者,自己带着疑虑而忆念的行为,也就是“有疑虑的行为”,这是它的意思。因为他白天在集会处等地方,看到比丘们聚在一起商量事情,就会想:“这些人聚在一起商量,莫非是知道了我的所作所为才商量的?”他就是这样有疑虑的行为。巴利 注疏 1
91. Tikaniddese – dussīloti nissīlo. Pāpadhammoti lāmakadhammo. Sīlavipattiyā vā dussīlo, diṭṭhivipattiyā pāpadhammo . Kāyavacīsaṃvarabhedena dussīlo, sesasaṃvarabhedena pāpadhammo. Asuddhapayogatāya dussīlo, asuddhāsayatāya pāpadhammo. Kusalasīlavirahena dussīlo; akusalasīlasamannāgamena pāpadhammo. Asucīti asucīhi kāyakammādīhi samannāgato. Saṅkassarasamācāroti saṅkāya parehi saritabbasamācāro. Kiñcideva asāruppaṃ disvā ‘idaṃ iminā kataṃ bhavissatī’ti evaṃ parehi āsaṅkanīyasamācāro, attanoyeva vā saṅkāya saritabbasamācāro – sāsaṅkasamācāroti attho. Tassa hi divāṭṭhānādīsu sannipatitvā kiñcideva mantayante bhikkhū disvā ‘ime ekato hutvā mantenti, kacci nu kho mayā katakammaṃ jānitvā mantentī’ti evaṃ sāsaṅkasamācāro hoti.
“隐藏恶行”是指:具有应当隐藏的恶业。“不是沙门却自称沙门”是指:本来不是沙门,却因为装成沙门的样子,而自称“我是沙门”。“不是梵行者却自称梵行者”是指:看到别的梵行者穿着整齐、披衣严整、拿着好钵,在村落、城镇、国土、王都中托钵维持生活,自己也用同样的方式去做,于是就像在宣称“我是梵行者”一样。不过,说了“我是比丘”之后进入布萨堂等处的,确实就是自称梵行者;同样,接受僧团所得利养的,也是如此。“内腐”是指:被腐败的业所渗入而内腐;或者因为毫无德行、缺少功德的精髓而内腐。“漏泄”是指:被贪等烦恼所浸透。“如污物生”是指:已经生起了贪等污秽。或者,“污物”是指混有腐尸的脏水。在这个教法里,所谓恶戒者,因为令人厌恶,就像混有腐尸的脏水一样。因此,就像由污物所生,所以叫“如污物生”。巴利
Paṭicchannakammantoti paṭicchādetabbayuttakena pāpakammena samannāgato. Assamaṇo samaṇapaṭiññoti assamaṇo hutvāva samaṇapatirūpakatāya ‘samaṇo aha’nti evaṃ paṭiñño. Abrahmacārī brahmacāripaṭiññoti aññe brahmacārino sunivatthe supārute sumbhakapattadhare gāmanigamajanapadarājadhānīsu piṇḍāya caritvā jīvikaṃ kappente disvā sayampi tādisena ākārena tathā paṭipajjanato ‘ahaṃ brahmacārī’ti paṭiññaṃ dento viya hoti. ‘Ahaṃ bhikkhū’ti vatvā uposathaggādīni pavisanto pana brahmacāripaṭiñño hotiyeva, tathā saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ gaṇhanto. Antopūtīti pūtinā kammena anto anupaviṭṭho, nigguṇatāya vā guṇasāravirahitattā antopūti. Avassutoti rāgādīhi tinto. Kasambujātoti sañjātarāgādikacavaro. Atha vā kasambu vuccati tintakuṇapagataṃ kasaṭaudakaṃ. Imasmiñca sāsane dussīlo nāma jigucchanīyattā tintakuṇapakasaṭaudakasadiso. Tasmā kasambu viya jātoti kasambujāto.
他不会这样想。为什么不会呢?因为他本来可以依靠那个基础证得阿罗汉果,但那个基础已经坏掉了。就像旃陀罗童子,即使听到“某位刹帝利童子已经灌顶为王”,因为自己不是出生在能获得灌顶的家族,就不会这样想:“我什么时候也能像那位刹帝利童子一样获得灌顶呢?”同样,破戒的比丘即使听到“某位比丘已经证得阿罗汉果”,因为他不具备那个戒的基础——依靠它才能证得阿罗汉果——所以不会这样想:“我什么时候也能像那位具戒者一样证得阿罗汉果呢?”这种人,因为对阿罗汉果没有渴望,就叫做“无渴望者”。巴利
Tassa na evaṃ hotīti kasmā na hoti? Yattha patiṭṭhitena sakkā bhaveyya arahattaṃ laddhuṃ, tassā patiṭṭhāya bhinnattā. Yathā hi caṇḍālakumārakassa ‘asuko nāma khattiyakumāro rajje abhisitto’ti sutvāpi, yasmiṃ kule paccājātā abhisekaṃ pāpuṇanti, tasmiṃ kule apaccājātattā na evaṃ hoti – ‘kudāssu nāmāhampi so khattiyakumāro viya abhisekaṃ pāpuṇeyya’nti; evameva dussīlassa ‘asuko nāma bhikkhu arahattaṃ patto’ti sutvāpi, yasmiṃ sīle patiṭṭhitena arahattaṃ pattabbaṃ, tassa abhāvato ‘kudāssu nāmāhampi so sīlavā viya arahattaṃ pāpuṇeya’nti na evaṃ hoti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo arahattāsāya abhāvā nirāsoti vuccati.
92 他会这样想,这是为什么呢?因为他所依止的那个基础是稳固的,依靠它就能证得阿罗汉果。就好比善生这位刹帝利童子,一听到“某位刹帝利童子已经灌顶登基为王”,因为自己就出生在能够获得灌顶的家族里,他就会这样想:“我什么时候也能像那位童子一样获得灌顶呢?”同样,持戒的人一听到“某位比丘已经证得阿罗汉果”,因为自己所依止的戒是稳固的,依靠它就能证得阿罗汉果,他就会这样想:“我什么时候也能像那位比丘一样证得阿罗汉果呢?”这样的人就叫做“有期望者”。因为他期望、渴望证得阿罗汉果,所以称为“有期望者”。巴利
92.Tassa evaṃ hotīti kasmā hoti? Yasmiṃ patiṭṭhitena sakkā bhaveyya arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ, tassā patiṭṭhāya thirattā. Yathā hi sujātassa khattiyakumārassa ‘asuko nāma khattiyakumāro rajje abhisitto’ti sutvāva yasmiṃ kule paccājātā abhisekaṃ pāpuṇanti, tasmiṃ paccājātassa evaṃ hoti – ‘kudāssu nāmāhampi, so kumāro viya abhisekaṃ pāpuṇeyya’nti evameva sīlavato ‘asuko nāma bhikkhu arahattaṃ patto’ti sutvāva yasmiṃ sīle patiṭṭhitena arahattaṃ pattabbaṃ, tassā patiṭṭhāya thirattā – ‘kudāssu nāmāhampi so bhikkhu viya arahattaṃ pāpuṇeyya’nti evaṃ hoti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo āsaṃso nāma vuccati. So hi arahattaṃ āsaṃsati patthetīti āsaṃso.
93 “他先前未解脱时”——这是说,那位漏尽者先前还没有证得阿拉汉解脱时,曾有过对解脱的期望,如今已经止息,所以他不会再这样想。就像一位已经灌顶的刹帝利,听到“某位刹帝利童子已经灌顶为王”,因为不可能同时有两个王位灌顶、两把白伞盖,所以他不会这样想:“我什么时候也能像那位童子一样获得灌顶呢?”同样,漏尽者听到“某位比丘已经证得阿拉汉果”,因为不可能同时有两个阿拉汉果,所以他不会这样想:“我什么时候也能像那位比丘一样证得阿拉汉果呢?”这种人,对阿拉汉果的期望已经消失,所以称为“离期望者”。巴利
93.Yā hissa pubbe avimuttassāti yā tassa khīṇāsavassa pubbe arahattavimuttiyā avimuttassa vimuttāsā ahosi, sā paṭippassaddhā, tasmā na evaṃ hoti. Yathā hi abhisittassa khattiyassa ‘asuko nāma khattiyakumāro rajje abhisitto’ti sutvā ekassa rañño dvinnaṃ rajjābhisekānaṃ dvinnaṃ setacchattānaṃ abhāvā na evaṃ hoti – ‘‘kudāssu nāmāhampi so kumāro viya abhisekaṃ pāpuṇeyya’’nti; evameva khīṇāsavassa ‘asuko nāma bhikkhu arahattaṃ patto’ti sutvā, dvinnaṃ arahattānaṃ abhāvā – ‘kudāssu nāmāhampi so bhikkhu viya arahattaṃ pāpuṇeyya’nti na evaṃ hoti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo arahattāsāya vigatattā vigatāsoti vuccati.
94 94. 在“病者譬喻”的解释中——为了先说明那个让这些人被称为“病者譬喻”的譬喻,所以说了“有三种病人”等话。其中,“适宜的”是指有益的、能促进增长的;“适当的”是指合适的。“不能从那种病中痊愈”,用这句话说明的是患了风病、癫痫等无法治愈的疾病、已经到了末期的病人。“能从那种病中痊愈”,用这句话说明的是患了疥疮、草花病、衰老等种种轻微小病的人。巴利 注疏 1
94. Gilānūpamaniddese – yāya upamāya te gilānūpamāti vuccanti, taṃ tāva upamaṃ dassetuṃ tayo gilānātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sappāyānīti hitāni vuddhikarāni. Patirūpanti anucchavikaṃ. Neva vuṭṭhāti tamhā ābādhāti iminā atekicchena vātāpamārādinā rogena samannāgato niṭṭhappatto gilāno kathito. Vuṭṭhāti tamhā ābādhāti iminā khipitakacchutiṇapupphakajarādippabhedo appamattakābādho kathito.
得到适合的食物,或者得不到——用这一点,说明了所有那些只要有人护理就能过得舒服的疾病。在这里,所谓合适的看护者,应当理解为具备照顾病人的各项条件、有智慧、能干、不懒惰的人。巴利
Labhantosappāyāni bhojanāni no alabhantoti iminā pana yesaṃ paṭijagganena phāsukaṃ hoti, sabbepi te ābādhā kathitā. Ettha ca patirūpo upaṭṭhāko nāma gilānupaṭṭhākaaṅgehi samannāgato paṇḍito dakkho analaso veditabbo.
看护病人的人已获准许,意思是“应由比丘僧团指派”。当那位病人靠自己的能力无法维持下去时,比丘僧团应当先征询那位比丘,然后指派说:“一位比丘和一位沙弥,你们来照顾这个人。”在他们照顾他的期间,病人和那两个人所需的一切,都是整个比丘僧团的责任。其他病人也应得到照顾,所以另外两位病人也应受到照料。是什么原因呢?因为即使是一位已证到究竟的病人,如果没人照顾,他也会心生怨恨:“如果他们照顾我,我就会舒服些,可他们却不照顾我。”由此投生到恶趣。但如果有人照顾,他就会这样想:“比丘僧团该做的都做了,这是我自己的业报如此。”于是对比丘僧团生起慈心,投生到天界。至于只患了轻微疾病的人,无论有没有得到药都能痊愈,他的病即使不用药也会平息,但用了药会平息得更快。这样他就能学习佛的教法,或者修习沙门之法。由于这个原因,所以说其他病人也应得到照顾。巴利
Gilānupaṭṭhāko anuññātoti ‘bhikkhusaṅghena dātabbo’ti anuññāto. Tasmiñhi gilāne attano dhammatāya yāpetuṃ asakkonte bhikkhusaṅghena tassa bhikkhuno ‘eko bhikkhu ca sāmaṇero ca imaṃ paṭijaggathā’ti apaloketvā dātabbā. Yāva pana te taṃ paṭijagganti, tāva gilānassa ca tesañca dvinnaṃ yenattho sabbaṃ bhikkhusaṅghasseva bhāro. Aññepi gilānā upaṭṭhātabbāti itarepi dve gilānā upaṭṭhātabbā. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Yopi hi niṭṭhappattagilāno, so anupaṭṭhiyamāno ‘sace maṃ paṭijaggeyyuṃ, phāsukaṃ me bhaveyya, na kho pana maṃ paṭijaggantī’ti manopadosaṃ katvā apāye nibbatteyya. Paṭijaggiyamānassa pana evaṃ hoti – ‘bhikkhusaṅghena yaṃ kattabbaṃ taṃ sabbaṃ kataṃ, mayhaṃ pana kammavipāko īdiso’ti so bhikkhusaṅghe mettaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā sagge nibbattati. Yo pana appamattakena byādhinā samannāgato labhantopi alabhantopi vuṭṭhātiyeva, tassa vināpi bhesajjena vūpasamanakabyādhi bhesajje kate khippataraṃ vūpasammati. Tato so buddhavacanaṃ vā uggaṇhituṃ samaṇadhammaṃ vā kātuṃ sakkhissati. Iminā kāraṇena aññepi gilānā upaṭṭhātabbāti vuttaṃ.
“不进入”就是说不进入。在诸善法中的决定,就是诸善法中以道之决定为名的正性决定。以此说明了句最上者这种人。第二句则取略解知者,就像教法中的那拉卡长老那样:在佛出世之间的空档期,他曾从独觉佛那里得到一次教诫,便证悟了辟支菩提智。第三句说明了广解知者。而需引导者则依附于他。巴利
Neva okkamatīti neva pavisati. Niyāmaṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattanti kusalesu dhammesu magganiyāmasaṅkhātaṃ sammattaṃ. Iminā padaparamo puggalo kathito. Dutiyavārena ugghaṭitaññū gahito sāsane nāḷakattherasadiso . Buddhantare ekavāraṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ santike ovādaṃ labhitvā paṭividdhapaccekabodhiñāṇo ca. Tatiyavārena vipañcitaññū puggalo kathito. Neyyo pana tannissitova hoti.
允许说法,就是允许每月八次讲法。对其他人的法也要讲,也就是也要向其他人说法。为什么呢?因为对于“句最上者”来说,即使在这一生中无法证悟法,也会成为未来的因缘。而那种无论有没有见到如来的色身、无论有没有机会听闻法与律,都能证悟法的人,如果没机会听闻,暂时还不能证悟;一旦有机会听闻,就能很快证悟。由于这个原因,应当向他们说法。对于第三种人,则应当反复说法。身证者、见至者、信解脱者,前面已经讲过了。巴利
Dhammadesanā anuññātāti māsassa aṭṭha vāre dhammakathā anuññātā. Aññesampi dhammo desetabboti itaresampi dhammo kathetabbo. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Padaparamassa hi imasmiṃ attabhāve dhammaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ asakkontassāpi anāgate paccayo bhavissati. Yo pana tathāgatassa rūpadassanaṃ labhantopi alabhantopi dhammavinayañca savanāya labhantopi alabhantopi dhammaṃ abhisameti; so alabhanto na tāva abhisameti, labhanto pana khippameva abhisamessatīti iminā kāraṇena tesaṃ dhammo desetabbo. Tatiyassa pana punappunaṃ desetabbova. Kāyasakkhidiṭṭhappattasaddhāvimuttā heṭṭhā kathitāyeva.
98 98. 关于“粪语者”等说法:“sabhaggato”指站在集会堂里。“parisaggato”指站在村众集会中。“ñātimajjhagato”指站在亲属中间。“pūgamajjhagato”指站在行会中间。“rājakulamajjhagato”指站在王族中间的重大裁决场合。“abhinīto”指被带去问话。“sakkhipuṭṭho”指被当作证人而受询问。“ehambho purisā”这是称呼语。“为了自己或他人”或因自己或他人的手足等,或因财物。“Āmisakiñcikkhahetu vāti”在这里,“āmisā”指所得利益。“kiñcikkha”指任何少许之物。乃至以鹧鸪、鹌鹑、芥子团、酥团等极少许贿赂为因,这就是其义。明知而故意说妄语,即明知故犯地说妄语。此即名为:如此之人,因其言语如粪,故称为“粪语者”。正如粪便为大众所厌恶不喜,此人的言语也为天人所厌恶不喜。巴利
98. Gūthabhāṇīādīsu – sabhaggatoti sabhāyaṃ ṭhito. Parisaggatoti gāmaparisāya ṭhito. Ñātimajjhagatoti dāyādānaṃ majjhe ṭhito. Pūgamajjhagatoti seṇīnaṃ majjhe ṭhito. Rājakulamajjhagatoti rājakulassa majjhe mahāvinicchaye ṭhito. Abhinītoti pucchanatthāya nīto. Sakkhipuṭṭhoti sakkhiṃ katvā pucchito. Ehambho purisāti ālapanametaṃ. Attahetu vā parahetu vāti attano vā parassa vā hatthapādādihetu vā dhanahetu vā. Āmisakiñcikkhahetu vāti ettha āmisanti lābho adhippeto. Kiñcikkhanti yaṃ vā taṃ vā appamattakaṃ. Antamaso tittiravaṭṭakasappipiṇḍanavanītapiṇḍādiappamattakassāpi lañjassa hetūti attho. Sampajānamusā bhāsitā hotīti jānantoyeva musāvādaṃ kattā hoti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo gūthasadisavacanattā gūthabhāṇīti vuccati. Yathā hi gūthaṃ nāma mahājanassa aniṭṭhaṃ hoti akantaṃ; evameva imassa puggalassa vacanaṃ devamanussānaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ hoti akantaṃ.
99 这种人就叫作花语者:因为他说话像花一样,所以被称为花语者。就像盛开的茉莉花或无忧花那样,被大众喜欢、喜爱;同样地,这种人的话语也被天神和人类喜欢、喜爱。巴利
99.Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo pupphasadisavacanattā pupphabhāṇīti vuccati. Yathā hi phullāni vassikāni vā adhimuttakāni vā mahājanassa iṭṭhāni kantāni honti; evameva imassa puggalassa vacanaṃ devamanussānaṃ iṭṭhaṃ hoti kantaṃ.
100 所谓“无过失”,就是说过失叫做嗔,没有过失就叫无过失,意思是无嗔,就像“无过失之支、白衣为盖”那句经文里所说的“无过失”一样。令耳舒适,是因为言辞甜美,让耳朵听着舒服,不会像针刺一样让耳朵疼痛。令人喜爱,是因为义理甜美,不让整个身体生起嗔怒,而是让人生起爱意。入于心,是说没有障碍地进入心中,安乐地进入心。城市女子,是因为功德圆满而称为城市女子;也指像在城市里长大的女子那样柔嫩;也指属于城市的,也就是城市居民的话语。城市居民说话是恰当的——他们把父亲只叫作父亲,把母亲只叫作母亲,把兄弟只叫作兄弟。这样的话被众人喜爱,所以叫“为众人所喜爱”。正因为被众人喜爱,所以也为众人所悦意、能让心增长,因此叫“为众人所悦意”。这就叫作——这样的人就称为“蜜语者”。也有版本写作“软语者”。两种写法意思都是言语甜美。就像所谓的“四种甜味”是甜美而精致的,这个人的言语对天和人也同样是甜美的。巴利
100.Nelāti elaṃ vuccati doso. Nāssā elanti nelā. Niddosāti attho, ‘‘nelaṅgo setapacchādo’’ti (udā. 65) ettha vuttanelaṃ viya. Kaṇṇasukhāti byañjanamadhuratāya kaṇṇānaṃ sukhā. Sūcivijjhanaṃ viya kaṇṇasūlaṃ na janeti. Atthamadhuratāya sakalasarīre kopaṃ ajanetvā pemaṃ janetīti pemanīyā. Hadayaṃ gacchati appaṭihaññamānā sukhena cittaṃ pavisatīti hadayaṅgamā. Guṇaparipuṇṇatāya pure bhavāti porī. Pure saṃvaḍḍhanārī viya sukumārātipi porī. Purassa esātipi porī. Nagaravāsīnaṃ kathāti attho. Nagaravāsino hi yuttakathā honti. Pitimattaṃ pitāti, mātimattaṃ mātāti, bhātimattaṃ bhātāti vadanti. Evarūpī kathā bahuno janassa kantā hotīti bahujanakantā. Bahujanassa kantabhāveneva bahuno janassa manāpā cittavuddhikarāti bahujanamanāpā. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo madhubhāṇīti vuccati. Mudubhāṇītipi pāṭho. Ubhayatthāpi madhuravacanoti attho. Yathā hi catumadhuraṃ nāma madhuraṃ paṇītaṃ; evameva imassa puggalassa vacanaṃ devamanussānaṃ madhuraṃ hoti.
101 101. 在“疮譬喻心”等说法中——“执著”是指黏住。“被激怒”是指因愤怒而激动。“变得败坏”是指舍弃正常状态,变得腐臭。“僵持”是指变得僵硬、顽固。“微怒”指微弱的愤怒。“嗔”指因恶意而比前者更强烈。“不满”指不悦、忧恼的形态。“恶疮”指旧疮。“以棍棒”指以棍棒末端。“以瓦片”指以陶片。“流漏”指不断地流淌。旧疮依其自身的法性,本来就流出血液、脓液等三种液体,一旦被碰触,就流得更多。同样地,这里要结合譬喻来看:易怒的人就像旧疮。旧疮依其自性而流淌,易怒的人也依其自性,像肿胀者一样暴躁地行动。用棍棒或瓦片碰触,就像一句微不足道的话,却让他流出更多,心想“这个人竟然这样说我”,于是更加膨胀暴怒,应当这样理解。“这被称为”意思是:这样的人就被称为“疮譬喻心者”,即具有类似旧疮之心的人。巴利
101. Arukūpamacittādīsu – abhisajjatīti laggati. Kuppatīti kopavasena kuppati. Byāpajjatīti pakatibhāvaṃ pajahati, pūtiko hoti. Patitthīyatīti thinabhāvaṃ thaddhabhāvañca āpajjati. Kopanti dubbalakodhaṃ. Dosanti dussanavasena tato balavataraṃ. Appaccayanti atuṭṭhākāraṃ domanassaṃ. Duṭṭhārukoti purāṇavaṇo. Kaṭṭhenāti daṇḍakakoṭiyā. Kaṭhalāyāti kapālena. Āsavaṃ detīti aparāparaṃ savati. Purāṇavaṇo hi attano dhammatāya eva pubbaṃ lohitaṃ yūsanti imāni tīṇi savati , ghaṭṭito pana tāni adhikataraṃ savati. Evamevaṃ khoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ, duṭṭhāruko viya hi kodhano puggalo. Tassa attano dhammatāya savanaṃ viya kodhanassapi attano dhammatāya uddhumātakassa viya caṇḍikatassa caraṇaṃ. Kaṭṭhena vā kaṭhalāya vā ghaṭṭanaṃ viya appamattakampi vacanaṃ bhiyyoso mattāya savanaṃ viya ‘mādisaṃ nāma esa evaṃ vadatī’ti bhiyyoso mattāya uddhumāyanabhāvo daṭṭhabbo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo arukūpamacittoti vuccati. Purāṇavaṇasadisacittoti attho.
102 “夜晚的黑暗与漆黑”是指夜晚时,因为阻碍了眼识的生起而造成的浓重黑暗,使人看不见。“闪电的间隙”是指闪电出现的那一刹那。这里也要做譬喻的对应:应当把有眼睛的人看作修行者。黑暗就像入流道所断的烦恼,闪电划过就像入流道智的生起。在闪电的间隙,有眼睛的人能看见附近的事物;同样地,在入流道的刹那,能看见涅槃。黑暗再次笼罩,就像一来道所断的烦恼;闪电再次划过,就像一来道智的生起。在闪电的间隙,有眼睛的人能看见附近的事物;同样地,在一来道的刹那,能看见涅槃。黑暗再次笼罩,就像不来道所断的烦恼;闪电再次划过,就像不来道智的生起。在闪电的间隙,有眼睛的人能看见附近的事物,应当知道这就如同在不来道的刹那能看见涅槃。“这被称为”意思是:这样的人就被称为“闪电譬喻心者”,意思是他具有像闪电一样只有短暂光明的心。巴利
102.Rattandhakāratimisāyāti rattiṃ cakkhuviññāṇuppattinivāraṇena andhabhāvakaraṇe bahalatame. Vijjantarikāyāti vijjuppattikkhaṇe. Idhāpi idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – cakkhumā puriso viya hi yogāvacaro daṭṭhabbo. Andhakāraṃ viya sotāpattimaggavajjhā kilesā. Vijjusañcaraṇaṃ viya sotāpattimaggañāṇassa uppattikālo. Vijjantarikāya cakkhumato purisassa sāmantā rūpadassanaṃ viya sotāpattimaggakkhaṇe nibbānadassanaṃ. Puna andhakārāvattharaṇaṃ viya sakadāgāmimaggavajjhā kilesā. Puna vijjusañcaraṇaṃ viya sakadāgāmimaggañāṇassa uppādo. Vijjantarikāya cakkhumato purisassa sāmantā rūpadassanaṃ viya sakadāgāmimaggakkhaṇe nibbānadassanaṃ. Puna andhakārāvattharaṇaṃ viya anāgāmimaggavajjhā kilesā. Puna vijjusañcaraṇaṃ viya anāgāmimaggañāṇassa uppādo. Vijjantarikāya cakkhumato purisassa sāmantā rūpadassanaṃ viya anāgāmimaggakkhaṇe nibbānadassanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo vijjūpamacittoti vuccati. Ittarakālobhāsena vijjusadisacittoti attho.
103 103. 对于“金刚喻心”这一点,也应作譬喻对应:金刚应当看作阿罗汉道智,宝石块和石块应当看作被阿罗汉道所断的烦恼。就像金刚穿透宝石块或石块之后,不存在无处可去的情况,同样,以阿罗汉道智,不存在断不了的烦恼。就像金刚穿透之后不再被填补,应当理解:被阿罗汉道所断的烦恼不再生起。这就叫作——这样的人就称为“金刚喻心者”。意思是:他的心像金刚一样,有能力彻底摧毁烦恼的根本。巴利
103. Vajirūpamacittatāyapi idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – vajiraṃ viya hi arahattamaggañāṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Maṇigaṇṭhipāsāṇagaṇṭhi viya arahattamaggavajjhā kilesā. Vajirassa maṇigaṇṭhiṃ vā pāsāṇagaṇṭhiṃ vā vinivijjhitvā agamanabhāvassa natthibhāvo viya arahattamaggañāṇena acchejjānaṃ kilesānaṃ natthibhāvo. Vajirena nibbiddhavedhassa puna apaṭipūraṇaṃ viya arahattamaggena chinnānaṃ kilesānaṃ puna anuppādo daṭṭhabbo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo vajirūpamacittoti vuccati. Kilesānaṃ mūlaghātakaraṇasamatthatāya vajirena sadisacittoti attho.
104 104. 在“盲者”等比喻中,“没有那样的眼”意思是:没有那种类型、那种性质的慧眼。“令其增长”意思是:让它变得丰足、增广。“有罪与无罪”是指有过失与没有过失。“低劣与殊胜”是指最下与最上。“黑与白相对”是指黑与白二者,因为互相排斥、彼此对立,所以称为相对。这里简要地说:对于善法,能以慧眼识别“这些是善法”;对于不善法,能以慧眼识别“这些是不善法”;对于有罪、无罪等也是如此。至于黑与白相对的情况,则是能以慧眼识别“黑法是白法的对立面”“白法是黑法的对立面”。“没有那样的眼”这句话,其余各处也应依照这个道理来理解。“这被称为”意思是:这样的人,因为缺少能积集现世财富的慧眼,也缺少能净治来世利益的慧眼,所以被称为盲者。第二种人,因为有能积集现世财富的慧眼,但没有能净治来世利益的慧眼,所以被称为独眼者。第三种人,因为两者都有,所以被称为双眼者。巴利
104. Andhādīsu tathārūpaṃ cakkhu na hotīti tathājātikaṃ tathāsabhāvaṃ paññācakkhu na hoti. Phātiṃ kareyyāti phītaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ kareyya. Sāvajjānavajjeti sadosaniddose. Hīnappaṇīteti adhamuttame. Kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgeti kaṇhasukkāyeva aññamaññapaṭibāhanato paṭipakkhavasena sappaṭibhāgāti vuccanti. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo – kusale dhamme ‘kusalā dhammā’ti yena paññācakkhunā jāneyya, akusale dhamme ‘akusalā dhammā’ti, sāvajjādīsupi eseva nayo. Kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgesu pana kaṇhadhamme ‘sukkasuppaṭibhāgā’ti, sukkadhamme ‘kaṇhasappaṭibhāgā’ti yena paññācakkhunā jāneyya. Tathārūpampissa cakkhu na hotīti iminā nayena sesaṭṭhānesupi attho veditabbo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo diṭṭhadhammikabhogasaṃharaṇapaññācakkhuno ca samparāyikatthasodhanapaññācakkhuno ca abhāvā andhoti vuccati. Dutiyo diṭṭhadhammikabhogasaṃharaṇapaññācakkhuno bhāvā, samparāyikatthasodhanapaññācakkhuno pana abhāvā ekacakkhūti vuccati. Tatiyo dvinnampi bhāvā dvicakkhūti vuccati.
107 在“倒覆慧”等之中,“说法”是指:居士为了听法而来,于是放下自己的事务而为他说法。“初善”是指在开头就善妙、吉祥、没有过失、没有瑕疵地来说法。其余各句也是同样的道理。这里,“初”指开头的安立,“中”指说法的中间,“后”指结论。这样一来,说法者在说法时,无论在开头的安立上,还是在中间、结尾,都只是以善妙、吉祥、没有过失来说。这里,教说有初、中、后,教法也有初、中、后。其中,就教说而言:四句偈中,第一句是初,两句是中,最后一句是后。单一相续经中,序分是初,相续是中,以“此即世尊所说”为终结是后。多相续经中,第一相续是初,此后一或多相续是中,最后是后。这就是教说的方式。巴利 注疏 1
107. Avakujjapaññādīsu dhammaṃ desentīti upāsako dhammassavanatthāya āgatoti attano kammaṃ pahāya dhammaṃ desenti. Ādikalyāṇanti ādimhi kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjaṃ niddosaṃ katvā desenti. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Ettha pana ādīti pubbapaṭṭhapanā. Majjhanti kathāvemajjhaṃ. Pariyosānanti sanniṭṭhānaṃ. Itissa dhammaṃ kathentā pubbapaṭṭhapanepi kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjameva katvā kathenti, vemajjhepi, pariyosānepi. Ettha ca atthi desanāya ādimajjhapariyosānāni, atthi sāsanassa. Tattha desanāya tāva – catuppadikagāthāya paṭhamapadaṃ ādi, dve padāni majjhaṃ, avasānapadaṃ pariyosānaṃ. Ekānusandhikasuttassa – nidānaṃ ādi, anusandhi majjhaṃ, idamavocāti appanā pariyosānaṃ. Anekānusandhikassa – paṭhamo anusandhi ādi , tato paraṃ eko vā anekā vā majjhaṃ, pacchimo pariyosānaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva desanāya nayo.
在教法里,戒是开头,定是中间,观是结尾。或者定是开头,观是中间,道是结尾。或者观是开头,道是中间,果是结尾。或者道是开头,果是中间,涅槃是结尾。如果两两组合来说,戒和定是开头,观和道是中间,果和涅槃是结尾。所谓“有义”,就是让义理具足而宣说。所谓“有文”,就是让文句圆满而宣说。所谓“完全圆满”,就是让整体圆满无缺而宣说。所谓“清净”,就是让它清净、无缠结、无结缚而宣说。所谓“宣示梵行”,就是如此说时,宣示那最胜行所摄、包含三学的圣八支道。所谓“不忆念初”,就是不忆念先前所安立的开头部分。所谓“倒置”,就是口朝下放置。在此,应当看待倒置的瓶子如同倒覆慧的人。注水的时机如同获得说法的时机。水被倒出之时如同坐在那个座位上却无法领受之时。水不存留之时如同起身后无法忆持之时。所谓“此称为”,就是此类人称为倒覆慧者,意为下倾之慧。如此宣巴利
Sāsanassa pana sīlaṃ ādi, samādhi majjhaṃ, vipassanā pariyosānaṃ. Samādhi vā ādi, vipassanā majjhaṃ, maggo pariyosānaṃ. Vipassanā vā ādi, maggo majjhaṃ, phalaṃ pariyosānaṃ. Maggo vā ādi, phalaṃ majjhaṃ, nibbānaṃ pariyosānaṃ . Dve dve vā kariyamāne sīlasamādhayo ādi, vipassanāmaggā majjhaṃ, phalanibbānāni pariyosānaṃ. Sātthanti sātthakaṃ katvā desenti. Sabyañjananti akkharapāripūriṃ katvā desenti. Kevalaparipuṇṇanti sakalaparipuṇṇaṃ anūnaṃ katvā desenti. Parisuddhanti parisuddhaṃ nijjaṭaṃ niggaṇṭhiṃ katvā desenti. Brahmacariyaṃ pakāsentīti evaṃ desentā ca seṭṭhacariyabhūtaṃ sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ pakāsenti. Neva ādiṃ manasi karotīti neva pubbapaṭṭhapanaṃ manasi karoti. Kumbhoti ghaṭo. Nikkujjoti adhomukho ṭhapito. Evamevanti ettha kumbho nikkujjo viya avakujjapañño puggalo daṭṭhabbo. Udakāsiñcanakālo viya dhammadesanāya laddhakālo. Udakassa vivaṭṭanakālo viya tasmiṃ āsane nisinnassa uggahetuṃ asamatthakālo. Udakassa asaṇṭhānakālo viya uṭṭhahitvā asallakkhaṇakālo veditabbo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo avakujjapaññoti vuccati. Adhomukhapaññoti attho.
108 “散落”是指被丢进去。“因为失念而散落”是指由于忘失正念而散开。这里“正如是”应当理解为:这个人就像膝上的袋子一样。种种零食就像种种不同种类的佛语。坐在膝上吃种种零食的那段时间,就像坐在那个座位上领受教法的那段时间。站起来时因为失念而把零食撒落的那段时间,应当理解为从那个座位起身离开后不能好好记住的那段时间。“这称为”就是说,这样的人就叫做膝上慧者,意思是他的智慧就像膝上的东西一样。巴利 注疏 1
108.Ākiṇṇānīti pakkhittāni. Satisammosā pakireyyāti muṭṭhassatitāya vikireyya. Evamevanti ettha ucchaṅgo viya ucchaṅgapañño puggalo daṭṭhabbo. Nānākhajjakāni viya nānappakāraṃ buddhavacanaṃ. Ucchaṅge nānākhajjakāni khādantassa nisinnakālo viya tasmiṃ āsane nisinnassa uggahaṇakālo. Vuṭṭhahantassa satisammosā vikiraṇakālo viya tasmā āsanā vuṭṭhāya gacchantassa asallakkhaṇakālo veditabbo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo ucchaṅgapaññoti vuccati. Ucchaṅgasadisapaññoti attho.
109 “口朝上”是指把口朝上放置。“安住”是指站稳、停留。这里的“正如是”,应当把口朝上放着的瓶子,看作广慧之人。注水的时候,就像获得闻法教说的时机;水停留的时候,就像坐在那里领受的时机;水不翻转的时候,应知就像起身离去时还能忆持不忘的时机。“这称为”是说,这样的人就叫做广慧者,意思是智慧广博。巴利 注疏 1
109.Ukkujjoti uparimukho ṭhapito. Saṇṭhātīti patiṭṭhahati. Evameva khoti ettha uparimukho ṭhapito kumbho viya puthupañño puggalo daṭṭhabbo. Udakassa āsittakālo viya desanāya laddhakālo. Udakassa saṇṭhānakālo viya tattha nisinnassa uggahaṇakālo. No vivaṭṭanakālo viya uṭṭhāya gacchantassa sallakkhaṇakālo veditabbo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo puthupaññoti vuccati. Vitthārikapaññoti attho.
110 在“未离贪”等项目中:就像入流者和一来者一样,凡夫也对五种欲乐和三种有未离贪。但因为不堪任,所以没有被选取。譬如一个善巧的木匠为了取得可用的材料而进入树林,他不会从一开始就把遇到的树统统砍下,而只砍那些适合做材料的树;同样地,在这里,世尊也只选取堪任的圣者,凡夫因为不堪任,所以没有被选取,应当这样理解。“于欲离贪”是指对五种欲乐离贪。“于有未离贪”是指对色有、无色有未离贪。巴利
110. Avītarāgādīsu – yathā sotāpannasakadāgāmino, evaṃ puthujjanopi pañcasu kāmaguṇesu, tīsu ca bhavesu avītarāgo. Adabbatāya pana na gahito. Yathā hi cheko vaḍḍhakī dabbasambhāratthaṃ vanaṃ paviṭṭho na ādito paṭṭhāya sampattasampattarukkhe chindati, ye panassa dabbasambhārūpagā honti, teyeva chindati; evamidhāpi bhagavatā dabbajātikā ariyāva gahitā, puthujjanā pana adabbatāya na gahitāti veditabbā. Kāmesu vītarāgoti pañcasu kāmaguṇesu vītarāgo. Bhavesu avītarāgoti rūpārūpabhavesu avītarāgo.
113 在“如石刻”等比喻中,“潜在”是指因为还没有断除,所以它一直潜伏着。“不会很快坏掉”是指它不会中途消失,只有到劫灭时才会消失。这里说“正是如此”,意思是这个人的嗔怒也不会在当天、第二天或第三天就平息,而是会持续很久,只有到死时才止息,这就是这段话的意思。所谓“这被称为”,是说这一类人因为嗔怒持续长久,就像石刻一样,所以被称为“如石刻喻者”。巴利 注疏 1
113. Pāsāṇalekhūpamādīsu – anusetīti appahīnatāya anuseti. Na khippaṃ lujjatīti na antarā nassati, kappuṭṭhāneneva nassati. Evamevanti evaṃ tassāpi puggalassa kodho na antarā punadivase vā aparadivase vā nibbāti, addhaniyo pana hoti. Maraṇeneva nibbātīti attho. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo pāsāṇalekhā viya kujjhanabhāvena ciraṭṭhitikato pāsāṇalekhūpamoti vuccati.
114 这个人因为一点点小事就突然发火,这就是他的“嗔”。所谓“不久”,是说它不会持续很久,因为没有断除,所以它不会随眠潜伏。就像在地上画了线,被风等一吹很快就消失了;同样,他即使突然生起嗔怒,也会很快熄灭,这就是这里的意思。所谓“此称为”,是说这类人因为发怒的状态不能持续很久,就像地上的画线一样,所以被称为“地画喻者”。巴利
114.So ca khvassa kodhoti so appamattakepi kāraṇe sahasā kuddhassa kodho. Na ciranti aciraṃ appahīnatāya nānuseti. Yathā pana pathaviyaṃ ākaḍḍhitvā katalekhā vātādīhi khippaṃ nassati, evamassa sahasā uppannopi kodho khippameva nibbātīti attho. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo pathaviyaṃ lekhā viya kujjhanabhāvena aciraṭṭhitikato pathavīlekhūpamoti vuccati.
115 “粗重”是指极其粗重、像刺中要害一样的强硬话语。“粗恶”是指听起来不舒服。“不可意”是指心里不喜欢。“和合”是指变成一体。“联结”是指结合在一起。“融洽”是指没有间隔。或者也可以说——“和合”是指在心的活动等当中,以心彼此会合,就像牛奶和水融成一体,这是它的意思。“联结”是指在站立、行走等身体动作当中,以身彼此会合,就像芝麻和米混在一起,这是它的意思。“融洽”是指在诵习、问答等言语活动当中,以语彼此会合,即使曾经分离,也像亲密的朋友一样,变得更加亲爱,这是它的意思。再者——在应当做的事情上,和他们从一开始就共同做一件事,这是“和合”;进行到中间阶段,这是“联结”;一直进行到最后也不退转,这是“融洽”,也应当这样理解。“这被称为”是指:这类人因为像水画一样迅速和合,所以被称为水画喻。巴利
115.Āgāḷhenāti atigāḷhena mammacchedakena thaddhavacanena. Pharusenāti na sotasukhena. Amanāpenāti na cittasukhena. Saṃsandatīti ekībhavati. Sandhiyatīti ghaṭayati. Sammodatīti nirantaro hoti. Atha vā – saṃsandatīti cittakiriyādīsu cittena samodhānaṃ gacchati. Khīrodakaṃ viya ekībhāvaṃ upetīti attho. Sandhiyatīti ṭhānagamanādīsu kāyakiriyādīsu kāyena samodhānaṃ gacchati. Tilataṇḍulā viya missībhāvaṃ upetīti attho. Sammodatīti uddesaparipucchādīsu vacīkiriyāsu vācāya samodhānaṃ gacchati. Vippavāsagatopi piyasahāyako viya piyatarabhāvaṃ upetīti attho. Apica – kiccakaraṇīyesu tehi saddhiṃ āditova ekakiriyabhāvaṃ upagacchanto saṃsandati. Yāva majjhā pavattanto sandhiyati, yāva pariyosānā anivattanto sammodatītipi veditabbo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo udakalekhā viya khippaṃ saṃsandanato udakalekhūpamoti vuccati.
116 116. 在“粗布喻”这一段里——为了说明他们为什么被称为“粗布喻”,先要展示这个比喻,所以说了“三种粗布”等话。其中,“新”是指新织出来的。“粗布”是指麻布做的衣服。“色泽差”是指褪了色、不好看。“触感苦”是指摸起来粗糙。“价值低”是指值不了多少钱,只值半个迦诃波那。“中等”是指使用程度处于中间。因为它已经过了新的阶段,还没到破旧的阶段,正处在中间使用期,所以也是色泽差、触感苦、价值低。说它值不了多少钱,是因为它只值半个迦诃波那。到了破旧的时候,就只值半个摩娑迦或者一个迦迦尼迦了。“擦锅布”是指擦黑锅的抹布。巴利
116. Potthakūpamesu – yāya upamāya te potthakūpamāti vuccanti, taṃ tāva upamaṃ dassetuṃ tayo potthakātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha navoti navavāyimo. Potthakoti sāṇavākasāṭako. Dubbaṇṇoti vivaṇṇo. Dukkhasamphassoti kharasamphasso. Appagghoti atibahuṃ agghanto kahāpaṇagghanako hoti. Majjhimoti paribhogamajjhimo. So hi navabhāvaṃ atikkamitvā jiṇṇabhāvaṃ appatto majjhe paribhogakālepi dubbaṇṇo ca dukkhasamphasso ca appagghoyeva ca hoti. Atibahuṃ agghanto aḍḍhaṃ agghati. Jiṇṇakāle pana aḍḍhamāsakaṃ vā kākaṇikaṃ vā agghati. Ukkhaliparimajjananti kāḷukkhaliparipuñchanaṃ.
“新”是指从受具足戒算起还不满五年的比丘,即使他出生年龄已经六十岁,也仍然只是“新”。所谓“色泽差”,是指身体的外色和功德的外色都差。因为一个破戒的人坐在大众当中时,由于毫无威光,连身体的色泽都不圆满,功德方面的色泽就更不用说了。所谓“然而,凡是他的”,是指那些侍奉这个人的人,比如侍者,或者亲戚朋友等。所谓“他们的那种”,是指那些人亲近这个人,就像亲近六师外道等持邪见的人一样,也像亲近提婆达多的拘迦利等人一样,那种亲近在长久的时间里只会带来不利和痛苦。所谓“中等”,是指从受戒满五年起直到满九年之间,称为中等。所谓“长老”,是指从受戒满十年起,称为长老。所谓“他们这样说”,就是他们这样讲。所谓“你的又有什么用呢”,意思是说,你这个愚人所说的话有什么用处呢?所谓“那样的”,是指具有那样的性质、那样的本质,成为举罪羯磨的原因。巴利
Navoti upasampadāya pañcavassakālato heṭṭhā jātiyā saṭṭhivassopi navoyeva. Dubbaṇṇatāyāti sarīravaṇṇenapi guṇavaṇṇenapi dubbaṇṇatāya. Dussīlassa hi parisamajjhe nisinnassa nittejatāya sarīravaṇṇopi na sampajjati, guṇavaṇṇe vattabbameva natthi. Ye kho panassāti ye kho pana tassa upaṭṭhākā vā ñātimittādayo vā etaṃ puggalaṃ sevanti. Tesaṃ tanti tesaṃ puggalānaṃ cha satthāre sevantānaṃ micchādiṭṭhikānaṃ viya, devadattaṃ sevantānaṃ kokālikādīnaṃ viya ca taṃ sevanaṃ dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya hoti. Majjhimoti pañcavassakālato paṭṭhāya yāva navavassakālā majjhimo nāma. Theroti dasavassakālato paṭṭhāya thero nāma. Evamāhaṃsūti evaṃ vadanti. Kiṃ nu kho tuyhanti tuyhaṃ bālassa bhaṇitena ko atthoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathārūpanti tathājātikaṃ tathāsabhāvaṃ ukkhepanīyakammassa kāraṇabhūtaṃ.
117 在迦尸布的比喻中:所谓迦尸布,是取三种棉花,用纺成的线织成的细布。刚织成时,它贵重得无法估价;使用一段时间后,值两万或三万;老旧时则值八千或一万。巴利
117. Kāsikavatthūpamesu – kāsikavatthaṃ nāma tayo kappāsaṃsū gahetvā kantitasuttena vāyitaṃ sukhumavatthaṃ. Taṃ navavāyimaṃ anagghaṃ hoti. Paribhogamajjhimaṃ vīsampi tiṃsampi sahassāni agghati. Jiṇṇakāle pana aṭṭhapi dasapi sahassāni agghati.
“对他们来说,那个会成为”:对他们来说,那种亲近,就像亲近正自觉者等人一样,会长久地带来利益和安乐。因为依靠一位正自觉者,直到今日,得到解脱的众生多得无法计算。同样,依靠舍利弗长老、大目犍连长老以及其余八十位大弟子,投生天界的众生也多得无法计算。直到今日,跟随他们的见解去修行的众生,同样多得无法计算。“值得安放”:那位大长老所说的依于义理的话,就像迦尸布应当被放进香盒里一样,也应当被安放在头顶和心间。其余内容应按照前面所说的来理解。巴利
Tesaṃtaṃ hotīti tesaṃ sammāsambuddhādayo sevantānaṃ viya taṃ sevanaṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya hoti. Sammāsambuddhañhi ekaṃ nissāya yāvajjakālā muccanakasattānaṃ pamāṇaṃ natthi. Tathā sāriputtattheramahāmoggallānatthere avasese ca asītimahāsāvake nissāya saggaṃ gatasattānaṃ pamāṇaṃ natthi. Yāvajjakālā tesaṃ diṭṭhānugatiṃ paṭipannasattānampi pamāṇaṃ natthiyeva. Ādheyyaṃ gacchatīti tassa mahātherassa taṃ atthanissitaṃ vacanaṃ yathā gandhakaraṇḍake kāsikavatthaṃ ādhātabbataṃ ṭhapetabbataṃ gacchati, evaṃ uttamaṅge sirasmiṃ hadaye ca ādhātabbataṃ ṭhapetabbatampi gacchati. Sesamettha heṭṭhā vuttānusāreneva veditabbaṃ.
118 118. 在“易量”等词中——“易量”是指容易就能测量。“此处”是指在这个众生世间。“掉举”是指具有掉举。“高慢”是指像高高竖起的芦苇,意思是把空虚的我慢抬举起来而安住。“轻躁”是指具有用钵装饰等轻浮躁动。“饶舌”是指嘴巴粗鲁。“语散乱”是指言语不加约束。“不专注”是指缺乏心一境性。“心迷乱”是指心迷乱,像迷乱的牛、迷乱的鹿那样。“根门显露”是指根门敞开。这样的人就称为“易量”。就像少量的水很容易测量出它的量,同样,具有这些不善特质的人很容易测量出他的量,因此他被称为“易量”。巴利 注疏 1
118. Suppameyyādīsu – sukhena pametabboti suppameyyo. Idhāti imasmiṃ sattaloke. Uddhatoti uddhaccena samannāgato. Unnaḷoti uggatanaḷo; tucchamānaṃ ukkhipitvā ṭhitoti attho. Capaloti pattamaṇḍanādinā cāpallena samannāgato. Mukharoti mukhakharo. Vikiṇṇavācoti asaṃyatavacano. Asamāhitoti cittekaggatārahito. Vibbhantacittoti bhantacitto, bhantagāvībhantamigīsappaṭibhāgo. Pākaṭindriyoti vivaṭindriyo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo ‘suppameyyo’ti vuccati. Yathā hi parittassa udakassa sukhena pamāṇaṃ gayhati; evameva imehi aguṇaṅgehi samannāgatassa sukhena pamāṇaṃ gayhati. Tenesa ‘suppameyyo’ti vutto.
119 “难量”就是难以测量。不掉举等项,应按照前面所说的相反面来理解。这样的人就称为“难量”。就像大海难以测量一样,具足这些功德支分的人也同样难以测量。这样的人会让人产生“他是不来者呢,还是漏已尽者呢”这样的说法,因此他被称为“难量”。巴利
119. Dukkhena pametabboti duppameyyo. Anuddhatādīni vuttapaṭipakkhavasena veditabbāni. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo ‘duppameyyo’ti vuccati. Yathā hi mahāsamuddassa dukkhena pamāṇaṃ gayhati; evameva imehi guṇaṅgehi samannāgatassa dukkhena pamāṇaṃ gayhati. Tādiso ‘anāgāmī nu kho, khīṇāsavo nu kho’ti vattabbataṃ gacchati, tenesa ‘duppameyyo’ti vutto.
120 无法测量,所以叫不可量。就像虚空的量无法测量一样,漏尽者的量也无法测量。因此,他被说成是不可量。巴利
120. Na sakkā pametunti appameyyo. Yathā hi ākāsassa na sakkā pamāṇaṃ gahetuṃ, evaṃ khīṇāsavassa. Tenesa ‘appameyyo’ti vutto.
121 在“不应亲近”等说法中,“不应亲近”就是不应接近。“不应交往”就是不应依附。“不应承事”就是不应一次次坐在近旁去侍奉。在“戒等低劣”等说法中,应当根据相对比较来理解低劣:守护五戒的人,不应被守护十戒的人亲近;守护十戒的人,不应被守护四遍净戒的人亲近。“除非出于怜悯,除非出于悲愍”,意思是除了怜悯和悲愍之外。因为如果只是为了自己的利益,就不应亲近这样的人;但出于怜悯和悲愍而去接近他,是可以的。巴利
121. Na sevitabbādīsu – na sevitabboti na upasaṅkamitabbo. Na bhajitabboti na allīyitabbo. Na payirupāsitabboti na santike nisīdanavasena punappunaṃ upāsitabbo. Hīnohoti sīlenātiādīsu upādāyupādāya hīnatā veditabbā . Yo hi pañca sīlāni rakkhati, so dasa sīlāni rakkhantena na sevitabbo. Yo pana dasa sīlāni rakkhati, so catupārisuddhisīlaṃ rakkhantena na sevitabbo. Aññatra anuddayā aññatra anukampāti ṭhapetvā anuddayañca anukampañca. Attano atthāya eva hi evarūpo puggalo na sevitabbo. Anuddayānukampāvasena pana taṃ upasaṅkamituṃ vaṭṭati.
122 “相似”就是相同。“对于戒行同等的人来说,是宁静的”——意思是,对于通过戒行达到相同状态的诸人,他们的相续是宁静的。“我们会有关于戒的谈论”——意思是,我们这些戒行同等的人,会围绕戒本身来谈论。“那对我们将是安乐的”——意思是,那场关于戒的谈论,对我们来说将是安乐住、快乐住。“那对我们将是持续不断的”——意思是,那场谈论即使我们说上一整天,也会持续不断,不会中断。因为当两位持戒者中,一位在讲述戒的功德时,另一位会随喜;因此,他们的谈论既安乐,又能持续不断。可是,如果有一个破戒者在场,破戒者很难谈论戒,于是既没有关于戒的谈论,也不安乐,更不能持续不断。关于定和慧的谈论,也是同样的道理。因为两位获得定的人谈论定时,两位有智慧的人谈论慧时,即使过了整夜或整天,他们也不会察觉。巴利 注疏 1
122.Sadiso hotīti samāno hoti. Sīlasāmaññagatānaṃ satanti sīlena samānabhāvaṃ gatānaṃ santānaṃ. Sīlakathā ca no bhavissatīti evaṃ samānasīlānaṃ amhākaṃ sīlameva ārabbha kathā bhavissati. Sā ca no phāsu bhavissatīti sā ca sīlakathā amhākaṃ phāsuvihāro sukhavihāro bhavissati. Sā ca no pavattinī bhavissatīti sā ca amhākaṃ kathā divasampi kathentānaṃ pavattinī bhavissati, na paṭihaññissati. Dvīsu hi sīlavantesu ekena sīlassa vaṇṇe kathite itaro anumodati; tena tesaṃ kathā phāsu ceva hoti, pavattinī ca. Ekasmiṃ pana dussīle sati dussīlassa sīlakathā dukkathāti neva sīlakathā hoti, na phāsu hoti, na pavattinī. Samādhipaññākathāsupi eseva nayo. Dve hi samādhilābhino samādhikathaṃ, sappaññā ca paññākathaṃ kathentā, rattiṃ vā divasaṃ vā atikkantampi na jānanti.
123 恭敬、尊重,就是作出恭敬与尊重。更为增上,就是更加超胜。戒蕴,就是戒的积聚。我将圆满,意思是:依靠那位戒行超胜的人,我要让自己尚未圆满的戒蕴得以圆满。于处处以智慧摄持,意思是:避开对戒不利、无益的法,受用对戒有利、有益的法,这样在每一处都以智慧摄持戒蕴,这就叫以智慧摄持。定蕴和慧蕴也是同样的道理。巴利 注疏 1
123.Sakkatvā garuṃ katvāti sakkārañceva garukārañca karitvā. Adhiko hotīti atireko hoti. Sīlakkhandhanti sīlarāsiṃ. Paripūressāmīti taṃ atirekasīlaṃ puggalaṃ nissāya attano aparipūraṃ sīlarāsiṃ paripūraṃ karissāmi. Tattha tattha paññāya anuggahessāmīti ettha sīlassa asappāye anupakāradhamme vajjetvā sappāye upakāradhamme sevanto tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne sīlakkhandhaṃ paññāya anuggaṇhāti nāma. Samādhipaññākkhandhesupi eseva nayo.
124 124. 关于“应被厌恶”等——“应被厌恶”是指应该像厌恶粪便那样厌恶它。“然而他的”是指然而他的。“名声”就是谈论的声音。“正是如此”在这里应当理解为:破戒就像粪坑一样。掉进粪坑里站着的人,就像缠在蛇上的破戒者。就像那个人从粪坑里被拉出来时,即使有蛇爬上了他的身体,也未被咬一样;同样,亲近破戒者时,他的行为就成了原因;应当知道,亲近破戒者时恶名声传扬开来,就像身体涂满粪便后蛇离开的时候一样。巴利 注疏 1
124. Jigucchitabbādīsu – jigucchitabboti gūthaṃ viya jigucchitabbo. Atha kho nanti atha kho assa. Kittisaddoti kathāsaddo. Evamevanti ettha gūthakūpo viya dussīlyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Gūthakūpe patitvā ṭhito dhamanīahi viya dussīlapuggalo. Guthakūpato uddhariyamānena tena ahinā purisassa sarīraṃ āruḷhenāpi adaṭṭhabhāvo viya dussīlaṃ sevamānassāpi tassa kiriyāya kāraṇabhāvo sarīraṃ gūthena makkhetvā ahino gatakālo viya dussīlaṃ sevamānassa pāpakittisaddassa abbhuggamanakālo veditabbo.
125 “丁度树火炭”说的是丁度树柴烧成的炭火。“更加猛烈地发出噼啪声”说的是:那炭火在燃烧时,本来就会迸出火星,发出“噼噼啪啪”的响声;而被人拨弄时,就发出更猛烈的响声,这就是这句话的意思。“正是如此”说的是:易怒的人同样如此,按他自己的性子,本来就已经躁动、暴躁;而当有人说了一点点话的时候,他就想“竟敢对我这样的人这样说话”,于是变得更加躁动、更加暴躁。“粪坑”就是装满粪便的坑,或者就是粪堆。这里譬喻之间的对应关系,应当按前面那样的方式来理解。因此,对这样的人应当保持旁观中舍,不应亲近。因为易怒的人,无论你过度亲近他、过度靠近他,他都会发怒;就算你想着“跟他打交道有什么用”,于是退开,他也还是会发怒。所以,应当像对待草火堆一样,保持旁观中舍,不应亲近。这话是什么意思呢?如果有人过度靠近草火堆去取暖,他的身体就会被烧到;如果有人过度远离草火堆,寒冷就不能止息;然而,既不靠近也不远离,以中舍的态度取暖,寒冷就能止息,身体也不会被烧到。因此,易怒的人就像草火堆一样,应当以中舍的态度旁观对待,不应亲近,不应结交,不应侍奉。巴利
125.Tindukālātanti tindukarukkhaalātaṃ. Bhiyyoso mattāya cicciṭāyatīti tañhi jhāyamānaṃ pakatiyāpi papaṭikāyo muñcantaṃ cicciṭāyati ciṭiciṭāti saddaṃ karoti. Ghaṭṭitaṃ pana adhimattaṃ karotīti attho. Evamevanti evamevaṃ kodhano attano dhammatāyapi uddhato caṇḍikato hutvā carati. Appamattakaṃ pana vacanaṃ vuttakāle ‘mādisaṃ nāma evaṃ vadatī’ti atirekataraṃ uddhato caṇḍikato hutvā carati. Gūthakūpoti gūthapuṇṇakūpo, gūtharāsiyeva vā. Opammasaṃsandanaṃ panettha purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Tasmā evarūpo puggalo ajjhupekkhitabbo, na sevitabboti yasmā kodhano atiseviyamānopi atiupasaṅkamiyamānopi kujjhatiyeva, ‘kiṃ iminā’ti paṭikkamantopi kujjhatiyeva, tasmā palālaggi viya ajjhupekkhitabbo, na sevitabbo. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yo hi palālaggiṃ atiupasaṅkamitvā tappati, tassa sarīraṃ jhāyati. Yo atipaṭikkamitvā tappati, tassa sītaṃ na vūpasammati. Anupasaṅkamitvā apaṭikkamitvā pana majjhattabhāvena tappentassa sītaṃ vūpasammati, kāyopi na ḍayhati. Tasmā palālaggi viya kodhano puggalo majjhattabhāvena ajjhupekkhitabbo, na sevitabbo, na bhajitabbo, na payirupāsitabbo.
126 善友,就是清净的朋友。善同伴,就是清净的同伴。同伴,就是一起走、结伴同行的人。善亲近,就是亲近善人、清净的人,也就是心倾向于他们、斜向于他们、朝向于他们,这就是其含义。巴利
126.Kalyāṇamittoti sucimitto. Kalyāṇasahāyoti sucisahāyo. Sahāyoti sahagāmī saddhiṃcaro. Kalyāṇasampavaṅkoti kalyāṇesu sucipuggalesu sampavaṅko, tanninnatappoṇatappabbhāramānasoti attho.
127 “在戒上圆满实行”等句当中,“在戒上圆满实行”是说:这些圣弟子对于作为梵行生活起点的、属于初梵行的、称为波罗夷的四条大戒学处,因为不违犯而做到;对于所犯的微细小戒,因为能从中出罪而做到。在戒方面凡是应当做的,他们都完整、圆满地去做,所以称为“在戒上圆满实行”。但是,由于能障碍定的欲贪和嗔恚还没有断除,能障碍慧的、覆藏真相的愚痴也还没有断除,所以他们虽然修定和慧,在定和慧方面却只是按有限的分量、只做一部分应当做的,因此称为“在定和慧上只做适量之行”。按照这个方法,另外两种情形中的意思也应当这样理解。巴利
127. Sīlesu paripūrakārītiādīsu – sīlesu paripūrakārinoti ete ariyasāvakā yāni tāni maggabrahmacariyassa ādibhūtāni, ādibrahmacariyakāni, pārājikasaṅkhātāni cattāri mahāsīlasikkhāpadāni, tesaṃ avītikkamanato yāni khuddānukhuddakāni āpajjanti, tehi ca vuṭṭhānato sīlesu yaṃ kattabbaṃ, taṃ paripūraṃ samattaṃ karontīti ‘sīlesu paripūrakārino’ti vuccanti. Samādhipāribandhakānaṃ pana kāmarāgabyāpādānaṃ, paññāpāribandhakassa ca saccapaṭicchādakassa mohassa asamūhatattā, samādhiṃ paññañca bhāventāpi samādhipaññāsu yaṃ kattabbaṃ taṃ mattaso pamāṇena padesamattameva karontīti samādhismiṃ paññāya ca mattaso kārinoti vuccanti. Iminā upāyena itaresupi dvīsu nayesu attho veditabbo.
在这里,还有另一种经的理路——巴利
Tatrāyaṃ aparopi suttantanayo –
比丘们,在这里,一位比丘在戒上做到圆满,在定上只做到适度,在慧上只做到适度。对于那些微细的学处,他有时会违犯,有时会出罪。这是什么原因呢?比丘们,因为在这里并没有说他做不到。但对于那些属于梵行根本、与梵行相称的学处,他则戒行稳固,安住在戒上,受持学处而修学。他因为断尽三结,成为入流者,不再堕入恶趣,决定趣向正觉。
比丘们,在这里,一位比丘在戒上……(中略)……他因为断尽三结,贪嗔痴变薄,成为一来者,只再来这世间一次,就彻底结束苦。
比丘们,在这里,一位比丘在戒上做到圆满,在定上做到圆满,在慧上只做到适度。对于那些微细的学处……(中略)……受持学处而修学。他因为断尽五种下分结……(中略)……不再从那个世间退转。
比丘们,在这里,一位比丘在戒上做到圆满,在定上做到圆满,在慧上做到圆满。对于那些微细的学处……(中略)……受持学处而修学。他因为诸漏灭尽……(中略)……现证并安住。巴利
‘‘Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sīlesu paripūrakārī hoti, samādhismiṃ mattaso kārī, paññāya mattaso kārī. So yāni tāni khuddānukhuddakāni sikkhāpadāni tāni āpajjatipi, vuṭṭhātipi. Taṃ kissa hetu? Na hi mettha, bhikkhave, abhabbatā vuttā. Yāni ca kho tāni sikkhāpadāni ādibrahmacariyakāni brahmacariyasāruppāni, tattha dhuvasīlo ca hoti, ṭhitasīlo ca, samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu. So tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā sotāpanno hoti, avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo. Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sīlesu…pe… so tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā, rāgadosamohānaṃ tanuttā, sakadāgāmī hoti; sakideva imaṃ lokaṃ āgantvā dukkhassantaṃ karoti. Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sīlesu paripūrakārī hoti, samādhismiṃ paripūrakārī, paññāya mattaso kārī. So yāni tāni…pe… sikkhati sikkhāpadesu. So pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ…pe… anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā. Idha pana, bhikkhave , bhikkhu sīlesu paripūrakārī, samādhismiṃ paripūrakārī, paññāya paripūrakārī. So yāni tāni khuddānukhuddakāni…pe… sikkhati sikkhāpadesu. So āsavānaṃ khayā…pe… upasampajja viharatī’’ti (a. ni. 3.87).
130 在“导师的辨别”这一段里,“遍知”是在说断除和超越。“于此”指的是那三类人。“应当由此来看”的意思是:通过这种教示,应当看出那位导师是色界定的获得者。第二段也是同样的道理。“正自觉者作为导师,应当由此来看”的意思是:通过这种与外道不共的教示,应当看出这第三位导师是一切知佛。因为外道在讲说对欲的遍知时,说的是色有;在讲说对色的遍知时,说的是无色有;在讲说对受的遍知时,说的是无想有。他们本该正确地讲说,却没办法正确地讲说。但正自觉者是用不还道来讲说对欲的遍知,也就是断除;用阿拉汉道来讲说对色和受的遍知,也就是断除。“这些是三位导师”,意思是:在这世间,两位是外道,一位是正自觉者,所以说有三位导师。巴利 注疏 1
130. Satthāraniddese – pariññaṃ paññapetīti pahānaṃ samatikkamaṃ paññapeti. Tatrāti tesu tīsu janesu. Tena daṭṭhabboti tena paññāpanena so satthā rūpāvacarasamāpattiyā lābhīti daṭṭhabboti attho. Dutiyavārepi eseva nayo. Sammāsambuddho satthā tena daṭṭhabboti tena titthiyehi asādhāraṇena paññāpanena ayaṃ tatiyo satthā sabbaññubuddho daṭṭhabbo. Titthiyā hi kāmānaṃ pariññaṃ paññapentā rūpabhavaṃ vakkhanti. Rūpānaṃ pariññaṃ paññapentā arūpabhavaṃ vakkhanti. Vedanānaṃ pariññaṃ paññapentā asaññabhavaṃ vakkhanti. Sammā paññapentā ‘evaṃ paññapeyyuṃ’, no ca sammā paññapetuṃ sakkonti. Sammāsambuddho pana kāmānaṃ pariññaṃ pahānaṃ anāgāmimaggena paññapeti . Rūpavedanānaṃ pariññaṃ pahānaṃ arahattamaggena paññapeti. Ime tayo satthāroti ime dve janā bāhirakā, eko sammāsambuddhoti – imasmiṃ loke tayo satthāro nāma.
131 在第二项“导师辨别”中,“于现法”是指在这一世的身体里。“把我宣说为真实、坚固”是指把“有一个叫做我的东西,是常的、恒久的、永恒的”宣说为真实的、坚固的。“以及于来世”是指在未来世的身体里也同样这样宣说。这里剩下的内容,应当依照前面所说的方式来了知。巴利
131. Dutiye satthāraniddese – diṭṭhe ceva dhammeti imasmiṃ attabhāve. Attānaṃ saccato thetato paññapetīti ‘‘attā nāmeko atthi nicco dhuvo sassato’’ti bhūtato thirato paññapeti. Abhisamparāyañcāti aparasmiṃ attabhāve evameva paññapeti. Sesamettha vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.
四法解说的注释巴利
4. Catukkaniddesavaṇṇanā
132 在四句解说中,非善士指卑劣的人。杀生,就是杀害生命。不与取,就是拿走别人没给的东西。于诸欲邪行,就是在各种欲乐中做不正当的行为。妄语,就是说虚假不实的话。沉溺于强酒、棕榈酒、葡萄酒等放逸,就是耽著于强酒、棕榈酒、葡萄酒与放逸。巴利
132. Catukkaniddese – asappurisoti lāmakapuriso. Pāṇaṃ atipātetīti pāṇātipātī. Adinnaṃ ādiyatīti adinnādāyī. Kāmesu micchā caratīti kāmesumicchācārī. Musā vadatīti musāvādī. Surāmerayamajjapamāde tiṭṭhatīti surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhāyī.
133 劝人杀生,意思是:就像自己杀生那样,他也让人去执取杀生这件事。其余各项也是同样的道理。这被称为……意思是:像这样的人,因为自己做了恶行而具足恶戒,再加上由于劝别人去做而造成的恶行,他就成了那半数恶业的继承者,所以被称为比非善士更非善士的人。善士,就是最上等的人。巴利 注疏 1
133.Pāṇātipāte samādapetīti yathā pāṇaṃ atipāteti, tathā naṃ tattha gahaṇaṃ gaṇhāpeti. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo yasmā sayaṃ katena ca dussīlyena samannāgato yañca samādapitena kataṃ, tato upaḍḍhassa dāyādo, tasmā asappurisena asappurisataroti vuccati. Sappurisoti uttamapuriso.
135 比善士更善士,是因为他自己具备善戒,又加上劝别人去做的善行,所以成为其中一半的继承者,因此就比最上之人更上。巴利
135.Sappurisena sappurisataroti attanā katena susīlyena samannāgatattā yañca samādapito karoti. Tato upaḍḍhassa dāyādattā uttamapurisena uttamapurisataro.
136 恶者,就是具足了十种恶,也就是十种不善业道。巴利
136.Pāpoti akusalakammapathasaṅkhātena dasavidhena pāpena samannāgato.
138 “善”是指具备由十种善业道所构成的善法,清净、贤善。这里其余的内容,因为前面已经说过,意思很清楚。巴利
138.Kalyāṇoti kusalakammapathasaṅkhātena dasavidhena kalyāṇadhammena samannāgato suddhako bhadrako. Sesamettha heṭṭhā vuttanayattā uttānatthameva.
140 在“恶法”等条目中:有恶法,所以叫恶法;有善法,所以叫善法。这里剩下的内容,意思已经很清楚了。巴利
140. Pāpadhammādīsu – pāpo dhammo assāti pāpadhammo. Kalyāṇo dhammo assāti kalyāṇadhammo. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
144 144. 在“有罪”等说法中:“有罪”就是带有过失。“以有罪的身业”,就是以带有过失的杀生等身业。其余几句也是同样的道理。“这被称为”,意思是像这样的人,因为通过三门所造作的业带有过失,所以就像充满粪便、尸体等污秽的地方一样,被称为有罪。巴利
144. Sāvajjādīsu – sāvajjoti sadoso. Sāvajjena kāyakammenāti sadosena pāṇātipātādinā kāyakammena. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo tīhi dvārehi āyūhanakammassa sadosattā, gūthakuṇapādibharito padeso viya sāvajjoti vuccati.
145 “有罪的多”:如果一个人的身业大多是有罪的,无罪的身业很少,那他就叫作“具有很多有罪的身业,只有很少无罪的身业”。语业和意业也是同样的道理。那么,什么样的人是这种类型呢?就是那种随顺村落或城镇的习俗,只是偶尔才受持布萨、持守戒律的人。这就叫作——像这样的人,由于在三门所造的业中,有罪的部分很多、无罪的部分很少,所以被称为“罪多者”。巴利 注疏 1
145.Sāvajjena bahulanti yassa sāvajjameva kāyakammaṃ bahu hoti, appaṃ anavajjaṃ; so sāvajjena bahulaṃ kāyakammena samannāgato, appaṃ anavajjenāti vuccati. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Ko pana evarūpo hotīti? Yo gāmadhammatāya vā nigamadhammatāya vā kadāci karahaci uposathaṃ samādiyati, sīlāni pūreti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo tīhi dvārehi āyūhanakammesu sāvajjasseva bahulatāya anavajjassa appatāya vajjabahuloti vuccati.
就像在某个地方堆着一堆难看又难闻的花,上面却到处散落着茉莉花、雨花和紫荆花。应当知道,这种人就是第二种人。又像在某个地方堆着一堆茉莉花、雨花和紫荆花,上面却到处散落着难看又难闻的枣花之类。应当知道,这种人就是第三种人。至于第四种人,因为他在三门所造作的业都没有过失,应当看作像装满四种甜味的金钵一样。其中,第一种是盲愚凡夫,第二种是偶尔行善的世间凡夫,第三种是入流者,一来者和不来者也以此而包括在内,第四种是漏已尽的人,因为他绝对是无可指责的。这是《增支部》的义注。巴利
Yathā hi ekasmiṃ padese dubbaṇṇāni duggandhāni pupphāni rāsikatānassu, tesaṃ upari tahaṃ tahaṃ atimuttakavassikapāṭalāni patitāni bhaveyyuṃ. Evarūpo ayaṃ puggalo veditabbo. Yathā pana ekasmiṃ padese atimuttakavassikapāṭalāni rāsikatānassu, tesaṃ upari tahaṃ tahaṃ dubbaṇṇaduggandhāni badarapupphādīni patitāni bhaveyyuṃ. Evarūpo tatiyo puggalo veditabbo. Catuttho pana tīhipi dvārehi āyūhanakammassa niddosattā, catumadhurabharitasuvaṇṇapāti viya daṭṭhabbo. Tesu paṭhamo andhabālaputhujjano. Dutiyo antarantarā kusalassa kārako lokiyaputhujjano. Tatiyo sotāpanno sakadāgāmianāgāminopi eteneva saṅgahitā. Catuttho khīṇāsavo. So hi ekantena anavajjoyeva. Ayaṃ aṅguttaraṭṭhakathāyo.
148 在“略说即悟者”等当中,“略说即悟者”在这里是指:所谓“略说”,就是智慧的开启;意思是说,仅仅在智慧被开启的那一刻,他就了知了。“与举例之时”也是指仅仅在举例的那一刻。“法现观”是指以智慧与四圣谛之法一起现观。这个人就是:当以“四念处”等方式简要安立论母时,能随顺说法而运用智慧、从而证得阿罗汉果的补特伽罗,就称为略说即悟者。巴利 注疏 1
148. Ugghaṭitaññūādīsu – ugghaṭitaññūti ettha ugghaṭitaṃ nāma ñāṇugghāṭanaṃ, ñāṇe ugghaṭitamatteyeva jānātīti attho. Saha udāhaṭavelāyāti udāhāre udāhaṭamatteyeva. Dhammābhisamayoti catusaccadhammassa ñāṇena saddhiṃ abhisamayo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ ‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’tiādinā nayena saṃkhittena mātikāya ṭhapiyamānāya desanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā arahattaṃ gaṇhituṃ samattho puggalo ugghaṭitaññūti vuccati.
149 广说即悟者,是指他了知已经详细分别、广说之义。所谓此人,就是先简略安立论母之后,当义理被详细分别解说时,能够证得阿罗汉果的人,就称为广说即悟者。巴利
149. Vipañcitaṃ vitthāritameva atthaṃ jānātīti vipañcitaññū. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ saṅkhittena mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā vitthārena atthe bhājiyamāne arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ samattho puggalo vipañcitaññūti vuccati.
150 150. 通过教导等(方式)应当被引导,所以叫“应被引导者”。随着次第而有了法的现观,意思是依次第而证得阿罗汉果。巴利
150. Uddesādīhi netabboti neyyo. Anupubbena dhammābhisamayo hotīti anukkamena arahattappatti.
151 只把文句当作最高标准的人,就是“以文句为最上者”。意思是:他不能靠那一生(的那种根性)证悟法,所以无法用那样的生命状态修成禅那、观、道或果。巴利
151. Byañjanapadameva paramaṃ assāti padaparamo. Na tāya jātiyā dhammābhisamayo hotīti na tena attabhāvena jhānaṃ vā vipassanaṃ vā maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā nibbattetuṃ sakkotīti attho.
152 152. 关于“相应辩才”等说法——所谓“辩才”,既指智慧,也指智慧所显现出来的言说。这里取的就是这个意思。他的辩才与义理相应、与理由相应,所以叫“相应辩才”。被提问后不能立刻迅速作答,所以他的辩才并非无碍,叫“非无碍辩才”。按这个方法,其余的也可以类推。这里第一种人:经过一段时间审察后,只看到相应之理,就像三藏小那伽长老一样。据说他被提问后,先把握问题,然后只讲相应与适切的理由。巴利 注疏 1
152. Yuttapaṭibhānādīsu – paṭibhānaṃ vuccati ñāṇampi, ñāṇassa upaṭṭhitavacanampi. Taṃ idha adhippetaṃ. Atthayuttaṃ kāraṇayuttañca paṭibhānamassāti yuttappaṭibhāno. Pucchitānantarameva sīghaṃ byākātuṃ asamatthatāya no muttaṃ paṭibhānamassāti no muttappaṭibhāno. Iminā nayena sesā veditabbā. Ettha pana paṭhamo – kiñci kālaṃ vīmaṃsitvā yuttameva pekkhati, tipiṭakacūḷanāgatthero viya. So kira pañhaṃ puṭṭho pariggahetvā yuttapayuttakāraṇameva katheti.
第二种人:别人刚一问,他就用这样或那样的话把问题挡回去;就算去审察,也看不出什么是相应的,就像精通四部尼柯耶的智者帝须长老一样。据说他被人提问时,连问题都等不到问完,就随便乱说一通。可是如果要追究他话里的含义,却在哪里都落不到实处。巴利
Dutiyo – pucchānantarameva yena vā tena vā vacanena paṭibāhati, vīmaṃsitvāpi ca yuttaṃ na pekkhati catunikāyikapaṇḍitatissatthero viya. So kira pañhaṃ puṭṭho pañhapariyosānampi nāgameti, yaṃ vā taṃ vā kathetiyeva. Vacanatthaṃ panassa vīmaṃsiyamānaṃ katthaci na laggati.
第三种人:就在提问的当下,他就能看到什么是合适的,就在那一刹那便作出回答,就像三藏小无畏长老一样。据说他一旦被提问,就能很快地说出来,而且他讲的内容合情合理、适切得当。巴利
Tatiyo – pucchāsamakālameva yuttaṃ pekkhati, taṅkhaṇaññeva vacanaṃ byākaroti tipiṭakacūḷābhayatthero viya. So kira pañhaṃ puṭṭho sīghameva katheti, yuttapayuttakāraṇo ca hoti.
第四种人,被问到时既看不到什么是合适的,也没办法用任何方式反驳,就像陷在极深的黑暗里一样,又像愚痴优陀夷长老那样。巴利
Catuttho – puṭṭho samāno neva yuttaṃ pekkhati , na yena vā tena vā paṭibāhituṃ sakkoti tibbandhakāranimuggo viya hoti lāḷudāyitthero viya.
156 156. 在说法者当中,“说少”是指对到场的听众只讲一点点。“不相应”是指:说法的时候,所说的既不合义理,也不合原因。“其众不巧”是指:坐着听法的听众,分不清相应与不相应、有理与无理、通顺与不通顺。意思是说,他们不懂这些。“如此者”就是指这一类愚痴的说法者。对于这样一类愚痴的听众,他就只得到一个说法者的名头而已。依照这种方式,应当理解一切处的含义。在这里,只有两种人是真正的说法者,其余的人则是因为混在说法者当中,才被这样称呼。巴利 注疏 1
156. Dhammakathikesu – appañca bhāsatīti sampattaparisāya thokameva katheti. Asahitañcāti kathento ca pana na atthayuttaṃ kāraṇayuttaṃ katheti. Parisā cassa na kusalā hotīti sotuṃ nisinnaparisā cassa yuttāyuttaṃ kāraṇākāraṇaṃ siliṭṭhāsiliṭṭhaṃ na jānātīti attho. Evarūpoti ayaṃ evaṃjātiko bāladhammakathiko. Evaṃjātikāya bālaparisāya dhammakathikotveva nāmaṃ labhati. Iminā nayena sabbattha attho veditabbo. Ettha ca dveyeva janā sabhāvadhammakathikā, itare pana dhammakathikānaṃ antare paviṭṭhattā evaṃ vuttā.
157 157. 在云的譬喻中,“云”指雨云,“雷”指打雷。其中,只打雷不下雨的情况是坏的。因为人们听到天打雷,就以为“要下大雨了”,于是拿出种子去播种。可如果天不下雨,田里的种子就烂在田里,家里的种子就烂在家里,结果就闹饥荒。不打雷而下雨也是坏的。因为人们会想“这时候雨量不够”,就只在低洼的地方播种。然后天一下大雨,把所有种子都冲进大海,照样闹饥荒。打雷又下雨的情况则是好的,那时候粮食充足。不打雷也不下雨的情况,则纯粹是坏的。巴利 注疏 1
157. Valāhakūpamesu valāhakāti meghā. Gajjitāti thanitā. Tattha gajjitvā no vassanabhāvo nāma pāpako. Manussā hi yathā devo gajjati ‘suvuṭṭhikā bhavissatī’ti bījāni nīharitvā vapanti. Atha deve avassante khette bījāni khetteyeva nassanti, gehe bījāni geheyeva nassantīti dubbhikkhaṃ hoti. No gajjitvā vassanabhāvopi pāpakova. Manussā hi ‘imasmiṃ kāle dubbuṭṭhikā bhavissatī’ti ninnaṭṭhānesuyeva vappaṃ karonti. Atha devo vassitvā sabbabījāni mahāsamuddaṃ pāpeti, dubbhikkhameva hoti. Gajjitvā vassanabhāvo pana bhaddako. Tadā hi subhikkhaṃ hoti. No gajjitvā no vassanabhāvo ekantapāpakova.
只是嘴上说,却不真正去做:嘴里一直念叨“现在我要完成教典的任务,完成修行的任务”,却不肯接受课诵任务,也不去修习业处。巴利
Bhāsitā hoti no kattāti ‘idāni ganthadhuraṃ pūressāmi, vāsadhuraṃ pūressāmī’ti kathetiyeva, na pana uddesaṃ gaṇhāti, na kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāveti.
能做却不说的那种人:他不会说“我要完成教典的修学,或者完成禅修的修学”,但到了适当的时候,他会把事情办成。按照这个方式,其他几种人也应当这样理解。不过,这一切都是针对施主来说的。有一种人,邀请僧众说“我要在某天布施”,到了时候却不做。这种人福德减损,比丘僧团也损失利养。另一种人,没有先邀请僧众,准备好了供养之后,心想“我要把比丘们请来”,却请不到,因为所有比丘都已经被别处邀请了。这种人也福德减损,僧团也损失那份利养。另一种人,先邀请僧众,然后准备供养并布施,这种人是尽责的人。还有一种人,既不邀请僧众,也不布施,这种人应当知道是“恶人”。巴利
Kattā hoti no bhāsitāti ‘ganthadhuraṃ vā pūressāmi vāsadhuraṃ vā’ti na bhāsati. Sampatte pana kāle tamatthaṃ sampādeti. Iminā nayena itarepi veditabbā. Sabbaṃ panetaṃ paccayadāyakeneva kathitaṃ. Eko hi ‘asukadivase nāma dānaṃ dassāmī’ti saṅghaṃ nimanteti, sampattakāle no karoti. Ayaṃ puggalo puññena parihāyati, bhikkhusaṅghopi lābhena parihāyati . Aparo saṅghaṃ animantetvāva sakkāraṃ katvā ‘bhikkhū ānessāmī’ti na labhati, sabbe aññattha nimantitā honti. Ayampi puññena parihāyati , saṅghopi tena lābhena parihāyati. Aparo paṭhamaṃ saṅghaṃ nimantetvā, pacchā sakkāraṃ katvā dānaṃ deti, ayaṃ kiccakārī hoti. Aparo neva saṅghaṃ nimanteti, na dānaṃ deti, ayaṃ ‘pāpapuggalo’ti veditabbo.
158 158. 关于老鼠的比喻——“挖了洞却不居住”:自己挖了一个住处、一个洞、一个穴,却不住在那里,而是住在别的某个地方,这样就落入猫等敌人的掌控。也有读作“挖掘者”的版本。“住了却不挖洞”:自己不挖,住在别人挖好的洞里,这样就保住了性命。第三类两种都做,保住了性命。第四类两种都不做,落入敌人掌控。在以这个比喻来类比的人当中,第一类人就像那只老鼠挖了洞一样,他学通了九分教法。但就像那只老鼠不住在洞里而住在别处、落入敌人掌控一样,这个人虽然依着教理的学习运用智慧,却不能证悟四圣谛法,只在世间利养的地方打转,于是落入被称为死魔、烦恼魔、天子魔的敌人掌控之中。第二类人就像那只老鼠不挖洞一样,他不学九分教法。但就像老鼠住在别人挖好的洞里而保住性命一样,这个人听了别人的说法之后,证悟四圣谛法,超越了三种魔的掌控。按照这个方式,第三类和第四类人的比喻对应关系也应当了知。巴利
158. Mūsikūpamesu – gādhaṃ kattā no vasitāti attano āsayaṃ bilaṃ kūpaṃ khaṇati, no tattha vasati, kismiñcideva ṭhāne vasati, evaṃ biḷārādiamittavasaṃ gacchati. Khattātipi pāṭho. Vasitā no gādhaṃ kattāti sayaṃ na khaṇati, parena khate bile vasati, evaṃ jīvitaṃ rakkhati. Tatiyā dvepi karontī, jīvitaṃ rakkhati. Catutthā dvepi akarontī amittavasaṃ gacchati. Imāya pana upamāya upamitesu puggalesu paṭhamo yathā sā mūsikā gādhaṃ khaṇati, evaṃ navaṅgaṃ satthusāsanaṃ uggaṇhāti. Yathā pana sā tattha na vasati, kismiñcideva ṭhāne vasantī, amittavasaṃ gacchati; tathā ayampi pariyattivasena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā catusaccadhammaṃ na paṭivijjhati, lokāmisaṭṭhānesuyeva caranto maccumārakilesamāradevaputtamārasaṅkhātānaṃ amittānaṃ vasaṃ gacchati. Dutiyo yathā sā mūsikā gādhaṃ na khaṇati, evaṃ navaṅgaṃ satthusāsanaṃ na uggaṇhāti. Yathā pana parena khatabile vasantī jīvitaṃ rakkhati; evaṃ parassa kathaṃ sutvā catusaccadhammaṃ paṭivijjhitvā tiṇṇaṃ mārānaṃ vasaṃ atikkamati. Iminā nayena tatiyacatutthesupi opammasaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
159 159. 关于芒果的比喻——“生而似熟色”:里面是生的,外表却像熟的一样。“熟而似生色”:里面是熟的,外表却像生的一样。其余两种也是同样的道理。在这里,就像芒果尚未成熟的状态是“生”,同样,在人当中,凡夫的状态就是“生”,圣者的状态就是“熟”。又像在那里,外表像熟一样就是“似熟色”;同样,在人当中,与圣者的行履等相似的状态,就是“似熟色”。按照这个道理,对于所类比的人,应当了知譬喻与对象的对应关系。巴利 注疏 1
159. Ambūpamesu – āmaṃ pakkavaṇṇīti anto āmaṃ bahi pakkasadisaṃ. Pakkaṃ āmavaṇṇīti anto pakkaṃ bahi āmasadisaṃ. Sesadvayesupi eseva nayo. Tattha yathā ambe apakkabhāvo āmatā hoti, evaṃ puggalepi puthujjanabhāvo āmatā, ariyabhāvo pakkatā. Yathā ca tattha pakkasadisatā pakkavaṇṇitā; evaṃ puggalepi ariyānaṃ abhikkamanādisadisatā pakkavaṇṇitāti – iminā nayena upamitapuggalesu opammasaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
160 160. 关于罐的比喻——“罐”就是陶罐。“空”是指里面空空的。“盖”是指盖上盖子放着。“满”是指里面装满了。“开”是指打开放着。而在所类比的人当中,应当知道:内心没有功德的实质、空虚无物,只靠外表光鲜来遮掩的人,就是“盖”的那种人。其余的也同样是这个道理。巴利
160. Kumbhūpamesu – kumbhoti ghaṭo. Tucchoti anto ritto. Pihitoti pidahitvā ṭhapito. Puroti anto puṇṇo. Vivaṭoti vivaritvā ṭhapito. Upamitapuggalesu panettha anto guṇasāravirahito tuccho bāhirasobhanatāya pihito puggalo veditabbo. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
161 在水潭的比喻中:先说水潭——即使水只有齐膝深,如果水因为混了十五种颜色,或者因为水很厚浊,而看不清水底,这就叫“浅而似深”。反过来,即使水深达三四个人高,如果水清澈,能看清底部,这就叫“深而似浅”。另外两种,则因为两种情况都可能具备,可以类推理解。人也是这样:因为烦恼炽盛,又没有深厚的功德,却做出和功德深厚者相似的前行等行为,这就叫“浅而似深”。按这个方式,其余几种也应如此理解。巴利
161. Udakarahadūpamesu – udakarahado tāva jaṇṇumattepi udake sati paṇṇarasasambhinnavaṇṇattā vā bahalattā vā udakassa apaññāyamānatalo uttāno gambhīrobhāso nāma hoti. Tiporisa catuporisepi pana udake sati acchattā udakassa paññāyamānatalo gambhīro uttānobhāso nāma hoti. Ubhayakāraṇasambhāvato pana itare dve veditabbā. Puggalopi kilesussadabhāvato guṇagambhīratāya ca abhāvato guṇagambhīrānaṃ sadisehi abhikkamādīhi yutto uttāno gambhīrobhāso nāma. Iminā nayena sesāpi veditabbā.
162 162. 在公牛的比喻中:先说公牛——那种会冲撞、威吓自己牛群的,对别人的牛群却温顺、性情柔和——这叫作“对自家凶暴,对别家不凶暴”。人也是这样:冲撞、攻击自己的眷属,用粗暴的方式对待他们,对别人的眷属却表现出温顺、谦恭的行为,这就是“对自家凶暴,对别家不凶暴”。按照这个方式,其余的也应该如此理解。不过在释义部分里,“已威吓”的意思是:冲撞、攻击之后,使其陷入惊恐状态。巴利
162. Balībaddūpamesu – balībaddo tāva yo attano gogaṇaṃ ghaṭṭeti ubbejeti, paragogaṇe pana sorato sukhasīlo hoti – ayaṃ sakagavacaṇḍo no paragavacaṇḍo nāma. Puggalopi attano parisaṃ ghaṭṭento vijjhanto pharusena samudācaranto, paraparisāya pana soraccaṃ nivātavuttitaṃ āpajjanto sakagavacaṇḍo hoti no paragavacaṇḍo nāmāti. Iminā nayena sesāpi veditabbā. Niddesavāre panettha ubbejitā hotīti ghaṭṭetvā vijjhitvā ubbegappattaṃ karoticceva attho.
163 163. 在毒蛇的比喻中:先说毒蛇——如果它的毒一到来就迅速扩散,但并不猛烈,也不会长时间折磨人,这就是“毒来得快,但不猛烈”。其余几项也照这样理解。至于对人的分类,意思本身就很浅显易懂。巴利
163. Āsīvisūpamesu – āsīviso tāva yassa visaṃ āsuṃ āgacchati sīghaṃ pharati; ghoraṃ pana na hoti, cirakālaṃ na pīḷeti – ayaṃ āgataviso no ghoraviso. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Puggalavibhājanaṃ pana uttānatthameva.
164 在“没有审察、没有彻底看透,就称赞本该受批评的人”这类句子里,“没有审察”的意思是:没有衡量、没有把握。“没有彻底看透”的意思是:没有用智慧深入他的功德。巴利
164.Ananuvicca apariyogāhetvā avaṇṇārahassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsitā hotītiādīsu ananuviccāti atulayitvā, apariggaṇhitvā. Apariyogāhetvāti paññāya guṇe anogāhetvā.
166 真实就是如实存在,没有颠倒就是真实。所谓适时,是指合适、恰当的时机。这里说的知时者,就是前面所说的适时。具体来说,如果有人是知时者,能了知时机,对于所问的问题,他知道此时即使被问到也不该说,此时则应该说——这就叫适时而说。住于舍,就是安住在中舍的状态中而住。其余各处都很容易理解。巴利 注疏 1
166.Bhūtaṃ tacchanti vijjamānato bhūtaṃ, aviparītato tacchaṃ. Kālenāti yuttapayuttakālena. Tatra kālaññū hotīti yamidaṃ kālenāti vuttaṃ. Tatra yo puggalo kālaññū hoti, kālaṃ jānāti, tassa pañhassa veyyākaraṇatthāya ‘‘imasmiṃ kāle pucchitenāpi mayā na kathetabbā, imasmiṃ kāle kathetabbā’’ti – ayaṃ kālena bhaṇati nāma. Upekkhako viharatīti majjhattabhūtāya upekkhāya ṭhito hutvā viharati. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthameva.
167 167. 在“以努力之果为生”等说法中:如果有人只是靠努力精进度过一天,得到一点点由此而来的残余果报,就以此维持生活,但他并没有因为这份努力而获得任何福德果报,那么就是针对这种人而说“某人努力”等话。“在其上诸天”:是指梵身天等以上的天人。因为这些天人根本没有需要靠努力精进去做的事,他们只靠福德果报生活。“有福德者”:这是指有福德的刹帝利、婆罗门等,以及从地居天开始直到化乐天的诸天。所有这些天人,都既享受努力之果,也享受福德之果。地狱众生则既不能靠努力产生生计,也没有任何靠福德果报而产生的生计。巴利
167. Uṭṭhānaphalūpajīvītiādīsu – yo uṭṭhānavīriyeneva divasaṃ vītināmetvā tassa nissandaphalamattaṃ kiñcideva labhitvā jīvikaṃ kappeti, taṃ pana uṭṭhānaṃ āgamma kiñci puññaphalaṃ na paṭilabhati, taṃ sandhāya yassa puggalassa uṭṭhahatotiādi vuttaṃ. Tatūpari devāti tato upari brahmakāyikādayo devā. Tesañhi uṭṭhānavīriyena kiccaṃ nāma natthi. Puññaphalameva upajīvanti. Puññavato cāti idaṃ puññavante khattiyabrāhmaṇādayo ceva bhummadeve ādiṃ katvā nimmānaratipariyosāne deve ca sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sabbepi hete vāyāmaphalañceva puññaphalañca anubhavanti. Nerayikā pana neva uṭṭhānena ājīvaṃ uppādetuṃ sakkonti, nāpi nesaṃ puññaphalena koci ājīvo uppajjati.
168 168. 在这些情况中,“生于低贱家族”等说法,是指与黑暗相应,所以叫黑暗者。又因为由于身恶行等而再次投生到地狱的黑暗中,所以叫以黑暗为归宿者。“尼沙陀族”是指猎鹿人等的家族。“韦那族”是指编竹器人的家族。“车匠族”是指制革人的家族。“普库萨族”是指倒弃花的人家。“生活困苦”是指生活痛苦。“丑陋”是指像尘垢饿鬼一样,肤色像烧焦的树桩。“难看”是指连亲生母亲看了也不喜欢。“矮小”是指侏儒。“独眼”是指一眼盲或双眼盲。“手曲”是指一手曲或双手曲。“跛足”是指一足跛或双足跛。“断翼”是指断翼者、如蛇般匍匐而行者。“灯具之物”是指油壶等灯具用具。如此,补特伽罗是黑暗者、以黑暗为归宿者,在这里,一个补特伽罗没有看见外面的光明,就在母胎中命终,投生到恶趣中,在整个劫中轮回。他也是黑暗者、以黑暗为归宿者。然而他可能是诡诈的补特伽罗。因为诡诈者有这样的投生,所以这样说。巴利 注疏 1
168. Tamādīsu – ‘‘nīce kule paccājāto’’tiādikena tamena yuttoti tamo. Kāyaduccaritādīhi puna nirayatamūpagamanato tamaparāyaṇo. Nesādakuleti migaluddakādīnaṃ kule. Venakuleti vilīvakārakule. Rathakārakuleti cammakārakule. Pukkusakuleti pupphachaḍḍakakule. Kasiravuttiketi dukkhavuttike. Dubbaṇṇoti paṃsupisācako viya jhāmakhāṇuvaṇṇo. Duddasikoti vijātamātuyāpi amanāpadassano. Okoṭimakoti lakuṇḍako. Kāṇoti ekakkhikāṇo vā ubhayakkhikāṇo vā. Kuṇīti ekahatthakuṇī vā ubhayahatthakuṇī vā. Khañjoti ekapādakhañjo vā ubhayapādakhañjo vā. Pakkhahatoti hatapakkho pīṭhasappī. Padīpeyyassāti telakapallakādino padīpūpakaraṇassa. Evaṃ puggalo tamo hoti tamaparāyaṇoti ettha eko puggalo bahiddhā ālokaṃ adisvā mātukucchismiññeva kālaṃ katvā apāyesu nibbattanto sakalepi kappe saṃsarati. Sopi tamo tamaparāyaṇova. So pana kuhakapuggalo bhaveyya. Kuhakassa hi evarūpā nibbatti hotīti vuttaṃ.
在这里,投生到低贱家族,或者投生到旃陀罗家族等,这些说法显示了出身的缺陷和过去已生起的条件的缺陷。“贫穷”等说法显示的是当下条件的缺陷。“生活困苦”等说法显示的是谋生方式的缺陷。“丑陋”等说法显示的是容貌的缺陷。“多病”等说法显示的是与苦因的结合。“不得”等说法显示的是乐因的缺陷和受用的缺陷。“身恶行”等说法显示的是与趣向黑暗之因的结合。“身坏命终”等说法显示的是趣向来世的黑暗。白分则按照所说黑分的相反方式来理解。巴利
Ettha ca nīce kule paccājāto hoti caṇḍālakule vātiādīhi āgamanavipatti ceva pubbuppannapaccayavipatti ca dassitā. Daliddetiādīhi pavattipaccayavipatti. Kasiravuttiketiādīhi ājīvupāyavipatti. Dubbaṇṇotiādīhi rūpavipatti. Bahvābādhotiādīhi dukkhakāraṇasamāyogo. Na lābhītiādīhi sukhakāraṇavipatti ceva upabhogavipatti ca. Kāyena duccaritantiādīhi tamaparāyaṇabhāvassa kāraṇasamāyogo. Kāyassa bhedātiādīhi samparāyikatamūpagamo. Sukkapakkho vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbo.
另外,这里因为与三种家族成就——也就是“再生”等——所带来的光明相应,所以称为“光明”,意思是成为光明。又因为通过身善行等而投生天界,达到光明的状态,所以称为“以光明为归宿”。
“生在刹帝利大富之家等”里面,“刹帝利大富”是指刹帝利中的大富者,也就是已经获得大财富的刹帝利。有些刹帝利的埋藏财富最少也有十亿,家里还堆着三罐金币供日常开销,这些就叫刹帝利大富。有些婆罗门的埋藏财富有八亿,家里还堆着一罐半金币供日常开销,这些就叫婆罗门大富。有些居士的埋藏财富有四亿五千万,家里还堆着一罐金币供日常开销,这些就叫居士大富。意思是“在他们的家族中”。“富裕”指自在。“大财”指埋藏财富的财富巨大。“大受用”指金、银器皿等受用物品巨大。“多金、银”指埋藏的金、银众多。“多财、资具”指资具众多而令人满足。“多财、谷”指牛群等以及七种谷物的众多。“端正”指容貌美好。“可观”指值得放下其他事务而终日观看。“令人欢喜”指仅凭观看即能令心生欢喜。“最胜”指最上。“肤色如莲”指如莲花色。所谓莲,是指身体。意思是其肤色具足。“具足”指具有。巴利
Apicettha tividhāya kulasampattiyā paccājātiādikena jotinā yuttato joti, ālokabhūtoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kāyasucaritādīhi pana saggūpapattijotibhāvūpagamanato jotiparāyaṇo. Khattiyamahāsālakule vātiādīsu khattiyamahāsālāti khattiyā mahāsārā mahāsārappattā khattiyā. Yesañhi khattiyānaṃ heṭṭhimantena koṭisataṃ nidhānagataṃ hoti, tayo kahāpaṇakumbhā vaḷañjanatthāya gehamajjhe rāsiṃ katvā ṭhapitā honti, te khattiyamahāsālā nāma. Yesaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ asītikoṭidhanaṃ nihitaṃ hoti, diyaḍḍho kahāpaṇakumbho vaḷañjanatthāya gehamajjhe rāsiṃ katvā ṭhapito hoti, te brāhmaṇamahāsālā nāma. Yesaṃ gahapatīnaṃ cattālīsakoṭidhanaṃ nihitaṃ hoti, kahāpaṇakumbho vaḷañjatthāya gehamajjhe rāsiṃ katvā ṭhapito hoti, te gahapatimahāsālā nāma. Tesaṃ kuleti attho. Aḍḍheti issare. Nidhānagatadhanassa mahantatāya mahaddhane. Suvaṇṇarajatabhājanādīnaṃ upabhogabhaṇḍānaṃ mahantatāya mahābhoge. Nidhānagatassa jātarūparajatassa pahūtatāya pahūtajātarūparajate. Vittūpakaraṇassa tuṭṭhikaraṇassa pahūtatāya pahūtavittūpakaraṇe. Godhanādīnañca sattavidhadhaññānañca pahūtatāya pahūtadhanadhaññe. Abhirūpoti sundararūpo. Dassanīyoti aññaṃ kammaṃ pahāya divasampi passitabbayutto. Pāsādikoti dassaneneva cittapasādāvaho. Paramāyāti uttamāya. Vaṇṇapokkharatāyāti pokkharavaṇṇatāya. Pokkharaṃ vuccati sarīraṃ. Tassa vaṇṇasampattiyāti attho. Samannāgatoti upeto.
169 169. 关于“低者低者”等说法——缺少现世或来世的成就,就是“低者”,意思是卑下、低劣。与此相反就是“高者”,意思是崇高、上升。其余部分应按照“黑暗者”等段落中所说的方式理解。再者——“低者低者”是指现在低劣,将来也还是低劣。“低者高者”是指现在低劣,将来会变得崇高。“高者低者”是指现在崇高,将来会变得低劣。“高者高者”是指现在崇高,将来也还是崇高。巴利
169. Oṇatoṇatādīsu – diṭṭhadhammikāya vā samparāyikāya vā sampattiyā virahito oṇato. Nīco, lāmakoti attho. Tabbipakkhato uṇṇato. Ucco, uggatoti attho. Sesamettha tamādīsu vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Apica – oṇatoṇatoti idāni nīco, āyatimpi nīcova bhavissati. Oṇatuṇṇatoti idāni nīco, āyatiṃ ucco bhavissati. Uṇṇatoṇatoti idāni ucco, āyatiṃ nīco bhavissati. Uṇṇatuṇṇatoti idāni ucco, āyatimpi uccova bhavissatīti.
170 在“树喻”中,先说“被心材围绕的边材树”:林中最老的那棵树自己是边材,而它周围那些树则是心材。其余的可以按这个道理去理解。至于人,则因为缺少戒这一核心,就是边材;因为具备戒行,就是心材,应当这样理解。巴利
170. Rukkhūpamesu – rukkho tāva pheggusāraparivāroti vanajeṭṭhakarukkho sayaṃ pheggu hoti , parivārarukkhā panassa sārā honti. Iminā nayena sesā veditabbā. Puggalesu pana sīlasāravirahato pheggutā, sīlācārasamannāgamena ca sāratā veditabbā.
171 171. 关于“以色为量者”等说法:把圆满具足的色当作衡量标准,就是“以色为量者”。在这当中,能让人生起净信的,就是“于色生净信者”。把名声传扬之语当作衡量标准,就是“以声为量者”。至于“身高”等说法:“身高”指高度;“围量”指远离过瘦过胖、周圆具足;“形体”指四肢大小各节在长短、圆直等相应位置上呈现的状态;“圆满”指如上所说各种都不缺少,或者指相好具足。“他人称赞”指别人在背后说出的功德称赞;“他赞叹”指他人以赞颂方式,以偈颂等总结所说的赞叹;“他褒扬”指他人于面前所说的褒扬;“他传誉”指他人辗转赞颂所起的传誉;“巴利
171. Rūpappamāṇādīsu – sampattiyuttaṃ rūpaṃ pamāṇaṃ karotīti rūpappamāṇo. Tattha pasādaṃ janetīti rūpappasanno. Kittisaddabhūtaṃ ghosaṃ pamāṇaṃ karotīti ghosappamāṇo. Ārohaṃ vātiādīsu pana – ārohanti uccattanaṃ. Pariṇāhanti kisathūlabhāvāpagataṃ parikkhepasampattiṃ. Saṇṭhānanti aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ dīgharassavaṭṭatādiyuttaṭṭhānesu tathābhāvaṃ. Pāripūrinti yathāvuttappakārānaṃ anūnataṃ, lakkhaṇaparipuṇṇabhāvaṃ vā. Paravaṇṇanāyāti parehi parammukhā nicchāritāya guṇavaṇṇanāya. Parathomanāyāti parehi thutivasena gāthādiupanibandhanena vuttāya thomanāya. Parapasaṃsanāyāti parehi sammukhā vuttāya pasaṃsāya. Paravaṇṇahārikāyāti paramparathutivasena parehi pavattitāya vaṇṇaharaṇāya.
172 衣粗劣:指衣服因为颜色难看等而显得粗劣。钵粗劣:指食器因为颜色、形状、材质而显得粗劣。住所粗劣:指住所因为缺少歌舞表演等享受而显得粗劣。种种:指以裸体外道等身份而呈现的多种多样。难行苦行:指折磨身体。巴利
172.Cīvaralūkhanti cīvarassa dubbaṇṇādibhāvena lūkhataṃ. Pattalūkhanti bhājanassa vaṇṇasaṇṭhānavatthūhi lūkhataṃ. Senāsanalūkhanti nāṭakādisampattivirahena senāsanassa lūkhataṃ. Vividhanti acelakādibhāvena anekappakāraṃ. Dukkarakārikanti sarīratāpanaṃ.
另一种分类方式:在这四种人当中,把外貌当作标准而心生净信的人,就叫作“以外貌为标准的人”。“对外貌有净信”这句话,说的正是这个意思。把声音当作标准而心生净信的人,就叫作“以声音为标准的人”。把衣服粗劣、钵粗劣当作标准而心生净信的人,就叫作“以粗劣为标准的人”。把法当作标准而心生净信的人,就叫作“以法为标准的人”。其余几个词也都是各自对应的同义说法。如果把一切有情分成三份,其中两份是“以外貌为标准的人”,一份不是“以外貌为标准的人”。分成五份的话,其中四份是“以声音为标准的人”,一份不是“以声音为标准的人”。分成十份的话,其中九份是“以粗劣为标准的人”,一份不是“以粗劣为标准的人”。但如果分成十万份,就只有一份是“以法为标准的人”,其余都不是“以法为标准的人”。这个世界的集会,就是这样由这四种标准的人组成的。巴利
Aparo nayo – imesu hi catūsu puggalesu rūpe pamāṇaṃ gahetvā pasanno rūpappamāṇo nāma. Rūpappasannoti tasseva atthavacanaṃ. Ghose pamāṇaṃ gahetvā pasanno ghosappamāṇo nāma. Cīvaralūkhapattalūkhesu pamāṇaṃ gahetvā pasanno lūkhappamāṇo nāma. Dhamme pamāṇaṃ gahetvā pasanno dhammappamāṇo nāma. Itarāni tesaṃyeva atthavacanāni. Sabbasatte ca tayo koṭṭhāse katvā dve koṭṭhāsā rūpappamāṇā, eko na rūpappamāṇo. Pañca koṭṭhāse katvā cattāro koṭṭhāsā ghosappamāṇā, eko na ghosappamāṇo. Dasa koṭṭhāse katvā nava koṭṭhāsā lūkhappamāṇā, eko na lūkhappamāṇo. Satasahassaṃ koṭṭhāse katvā pana eko koṭṭhāsova dhammappamāṇo, sesā na dhammappamāṇā. Evamayaṃ catuppamāṇo lokasannivāso.
在这个由四种标准构成的世间人群中,对诸佛没有净信的人少,有净信的人反而多。因为说到以色为标准的人,再没有比佛陀的色身更能让人生起净信的了。说到以声音为标准的人,再没有比诸佛的声誉之声更能让人生起净信的了。说到以粗劣为标准的人,世尊舍弃了迦尸国产的贵重衣服、价值极高的金钵,以及适合三季、具足一切圆满的殊胜宫殿,而受用粪扫衣、石钵、树下坐处等住处——再没有比世尊这种粗劣更能让人生起净信的其他粗劣了。说到以法为标准的人,在包括天界在内的世间,再没有比如来那不与凡夫共通的戒等功德更能让人生起净信的其他戒等功德了。就这样,世尊如同把这四种标准构成的世间人群一把抓在手中一样,安住其中。巴利
Etasmiṃ catuppamāṇe lokasannivāse buddhesu appasannā mandā, pasannāva bahukā. Rūpappamāṇassa hi buddharūpato uttari pasādāvahaṃ rūpaṃ nāma natthi. Ghosappamāṇassa buddhānaṃ kittighosato uttari pasādāvaho ghoso nāma natthi. Lūkhappamāṇassa kāsikāni vatthāni mahārahāni kañcanabhājanāni tiṇṇaṃ utūnaṃ anucchavike sabbasampattiyutte pāsādavare pahāya paṃsukūlacīvaraselamayapattarukkhamūlādisenāsanasevino buddhassa bhagavato lūkhato uttari pasādāvahaṃ aññaṃ lūkhaṃ nāma natthi. Dhammappamāṇassa sadevake loke asādhāraṇasīlādiguṇassa tathāgatassa sīlādiguṇato uttari pasādāvaho añño sīlādiguṇo nāma natthi. Iti bhagavā imaṃ catuppamāṇikaṃ lokasannivāsaṃ muṭṭhinā gahetvā viya ṭhitoti.
173 173. 在“为自利而行”等说法中,“具戒者”是指以戒而具足、成就。“具定者”等也是同样的方式。这里所说的戒,包括世间戒和出世间戒;定和慧也是如此。解脱只指阿拉汉果的解脱。智见是指十九种省察智。在“不令他人”等说法中,是指对别人说了“你也应该成为具戒者”之后,并不像自己持戒那样令别人受持、执取。这个方法在一切处都一样。在这四种人当中,第一种人相当于婆迦梨长老,第二种人相当于乌巴难达释迦子,第三种人相当于舍利弗和目犍连长老,第四种人相当于提婆达多。巴利 注疏 1
173. Attahitāya paṭipannādīsu – sīlasampannoti sīlena sampanno samannāgato. Samādhisampannotiādīsupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca sīlaṃ lokiyalokuttaraṃ kathitaṃ. Tathā samādhipaññā ca. Vimutti arahattaphalavimuttiyeva. Ñāṇadassanaṃ ekūnavīsatividhaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. No parantiādīsu – parapuggalaṃ ‘‘tayāpi sīlasampannena bhavituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vatvā yathā sīlaṃ samādiyati, evaṃ na samādapeti, na gaṇhāpeti. Eseva nayo sabbattha. Etesu pana catūsu paṭhamo vakkalittherasadiso hoti. Dutiyo upanandasakyaputtasadiso . Tatiyo sāriputtamoggallānattherasadiso. Catuttho devadattasadisoti veditabbo.
174 在“自苦”等条目中:所谓“自苦者”,就是让自己受热恼、让自己受苦的人。“致力于自我折磨”就是专门从事折磨自己的修行。“无衣者”就是没有衣服、赤身裸体的人。“放任行为者”就是行为放荡、毫无约束的人。在大便等事情上,他完全抛弃了世间良家子弟的行为方式,站着大便、站着小便,站着咀嚼、站着吃东西。“舔手者”是指手里的一团食物吃完后,用舌头舔手;也说明另一种情况:大便之后,把手当成棍杖一样,用手擦拭。据说他们把木杖视为有情。因此,为了圆满他们的修行方式,他这样做。为了接受布施,被说“来吧,尊者”时,他不来,所以是“不来尊者者”。因此,即使被说“请停,尊者”,他也不停,所以是“不停尊者者”。这两者,外道都不做,他们想“这将成为对他的话的实行”。所谓“持来者”,是指事先取来而持来的食物。“特别指定者”是指被告知“这是专门为你们做的”这样的食物。所谓“不受请者”,是指即使被邀请“你们应进入某某家、某某街、某某村”,他也不接受、不取。巴利 注疏 1
174. Attantapādīsu – attānaṃ tapati dukkhāpetīti attantapo. Attano paritāpanānuyogaṃ attaparitāpanānuyogaṃ. Acelakoti niccelo, naggo. Muttācāroti visaṭṭhācāro. Uccārakammādīsu lokiyakulaputtācārena virahito ṭhitakova uccāraṃ karoti, passāvaṃ karoti, khādati, bhuñjati ca. Hatthāpalekhanoti hatthe piṇḍamhi niṭṭhite jivhāya hatthaṃ apalekhati. Uccāraṃ vā katvā hatthasmiññeva daṇḍakasaññī hutvā hatthena apalekhatīti dasseti. Te kira daṇḍakaṃ sattoti paññapenti. Tasmā tesaṃ paṭipadaṃ pūrento evaṃ karoti. Bhikkhāgahaṇatthaṃ ‘ehi bhaddante’ti vutto, na etīti naehibhaddantiko. Tena hi ‘tiṭṭha bhaddante’ti vuttopi na tiṭṭhatīti natiṭṭhabhaddantiko. Tadubhayampi hetaṃ titthiyā ‘‘etassa vacanaṃ kataṃ bhavissatī’’ti na karonti. Abhihaṭanti puretaraṃ gahetvā āhaṭaṃ bhikkhaṃ. Uddissakatanti ‘‘imaṃ tumhe uddissa kata’’nti evaṃ ārocitabhikkhaṃ. Na nimantananti ‘‘asukaṃ nāma kulaṃ vā vīthiṃ vā gāmaṃ vā paviseyyāthā’’ti evaṃ nimantitabhikkhampi na sādiyati, na gaṇhāti.
不从缸口取食:意思是,不从缸里舀出来布施的食物,他不接受。不从锅口取食:“锅”指大锅或木盆,从那里拿出来的他也不接受。为什么?因为锅和盆会被勺子敲到。不跨门槛取食:意思是,不隔着门槛布施的食物,他不接受。为什么?因为这样一来,施主就是靠着我才弄出一个隔挡。对杵和臼也是同样的道理。两人(进食时):意思是,两个人在吃饭,其中一个站起来布施,他不接受。为什么?因为这会打断正在吃的那一口。关于不从孕妇(手中取食)等:孕妇腹中的胎儿受苦。哺乳妇则对婴儿的奶造成障碍。男女交接处则对性交造成障碍,所以他不接受。不在集食处:对于集众而做的食物。据说在饥荒时,裸行外道的弟子们为了裸行外道,从各处劝募米等物而煮成饭食,但上座裸行外道不从那里接受。不在有狗之处:意思是,哪里有狗站着想“我要得到一团食物”,那里不先给狗而拿来的食物,他不接受。为什么?因为这会成为那条狗的团食障碍。巴利
Nakumbhimukhāti kumbhito uddharitvā diyyamānaṃ bhikkhaṃ na gaṇhāti. Na kaḷopimukhāti kaḷopīti ukkhali, pacchi vā. Tatopi na gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Kumbhī kaḷopiyo kaṭacchunā pahāraṃ labhantīti. Na eḷakamantaranti ummāraṃ antaraṃ katvā diyyamānaṃ na gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Ayaṃ maṃ nissāya antarakaraṇaṃ labhatīti. Daṇḍamusalesupi eseva nayo. Dvinnanti dvīsu bhuñjamānesu ekasmiṃ uṭṭhāya dente na gaṇhati. Kasmā? Kabaḷantarāyo hotīti. Na gabbhiniyātiādīsu pana gabbhiniyā kucchiyaṃ dārako kilamati. Pāyantiyā dārakassa khīrantarāyo hoti. Purisantaragatāya ratiantarāyo hotīti na gaṇhāti na saṅkittīsūti saṅkittetvā katabhattesu. Dubbhikkhasamaye kira acelakasāvakā acelakānaṃ atthāya tato tato taṇḍulādīni samādapetvā bhattaṃ pacanti, ukkaṭṭhācelako tato na paṭiggaṇhāti. Na yattha sāti yattha sunakho ‘piṇḍaṃ labhissāmī’ti upaṭṭhito hoti, tattha tassa adatvā āhaṭaṃ na gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Etassa piṇḍantarāyo hotīti.
“成群结队而行”是指成群成群地飞行。如果人们看见裸行者,心想“我们要布施食物给这个人”,就走进施食的人家;当他们走进去时,原本停在篮口等处的苍蝇就飞起来,成群成群地飞动。因此,他不接受从那里拿来的食物。为什么呢?因为“由于我,苍蝇觅食的地方受到了妨碍”。“谷皮水”是用各种谷物做成的酸粥。在这里,只有饮酒是有罪的,而这个人对这也起有罪之想。“一家者”是指只在一家得到食物就返回的人。“一口食者”是指只靠一口食物维持的人。“二家者”等也是同样的道理。“一次施与”是指一次给予。所谓“施与”,就是一个小钵,人们把最好的食物放进去,然后放在那里。巴利
Saṇḍasaṇḍacārinīti samūhasamūhacārinī. Sace hi acelakaṃ disvā ‘imassa bhikkhaṃ dassāmā’ti mānussakā bhattagehaṃ pavisanti, tesu ca pavisantesu kaḷopimukhādīsu nilīnā makkhikā uppatitvā saṇḍasaṇḍā caranti, tato āhaṭaṃ bhikkhaṃ na gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Maṃ nissāya makkhikānaṃ gocarantarāyo jātoti. Thusodakanti sabbasassasambhārehi kataṃ sovīrakaṃ. Ettha ca surāpānameva sāvajjaṃ. Ayaṃ pana etasmimpi sāvajjasaññī. Ekāgārikoti yo ekasmiṃyeva gehe bhikkhaṃ labhitvā nivattati. Ekālopikoti yo ekeneva ālopena yāpeti. Dvāgārikādīsupi eseva nayo. Ekissāpi dattiyāti ekāya dattiyā. Datti nāma ekā khuddakapāti hoti, yattha aggabhikkhaṃ pakkhipitvā ṭhapenti.
一日食指隔一天吃一次。半月食指隔半个月吃一次。轮番食指按次序轮流供养的饭食,也就是按一天一轮、两天一轮、七天一轮、半个月一轮这样的日数轮着送来的饭食。食菜指吃生菜。食稗子指吃稗子米。在野稻等当中,所谓野稻,首先是指森林里自然生长的稻类。残皮指皮革匠刮削皮革后扔掉的碎屑。苔则指石苔、水苔,以及迦尼迦罗等树的树脂。糠指米糠。粥指粘在饭锅上的焦饭,从丢弃的地方捡来吃,也叫饭浆。饼粕之类就很明白了。食落果指吃掉落果实者巴利
Ekāhikanti ekadivasantarikaṃ. Aḍḍhamāsikanti aḍḍhamāsantarikaṃ. Pariyāyabhattabhojananti vārabhattabhojanaṃ. Ekāhavārena dvīhavārena sattāhavārena aḍḍhamāsavārenāti – evaṃ divasavārena ābhatabhattabhojanaṃ. Sākabhakkhoti allasākabhakkho. Sāmākabhakkhoti sāmākataṇḍulabhakkho. Nīvārādīsu – nīvārā nāma tāva araññe sayaṃ jātā vīhijāti. Daddulanti cammakārehi cammaṃ vilikhitvā chaḍḍitakasaṭaṃ. Haṭaṃ vuccati silesopi, sevālopi kaṇikārādirukkhaniyyāsopi. Kaṇanti kuṇḍakaṃ. Ācāmoti bhattaukkhalikāya laggo jhāmodano. Taṃ chaḍḍitaṭṭhāne gahetvā khādati. ‘‘Odanakañjiya’’ntipi vadanti. Piññākādayo pākaṭā eva. Pavattaphalabhojīti patitaphalabhojī.
麻布衣,就是用麻纤维织成的布。杂麻布衣,就是用混合纤维织成的布。裹尸布衣,就是从死尸身上丢弃的衣服。或者把芦苇草之类编结起来做成的下裙。粪扫衣,就是丢在地上的破布。树皮衣,就是用树皮做成的衣服。羚羊皮,就是羚羊这类野兽的皮。裂羚羊皮,就是把那张皮从中间剖开,也叫带蹄皮。吉祥草衣,就是用吉祥草编结成的衣。树皮衣、树皮片衣也是同样的说法。发毯,就是用人发做成的毯子。经里就是针对这个说的:“比丘们,譬如任何用线织成的布中,发毯被认为是最下劣的。”兽毛毯,就是以马鬃等兽毛织成的毯。枭羽衣,就是用枭鸟羽毛编结而成的下衣。常立者,就是站立不坐的人。巴利
Sāṇānīti sāṇavākacelāni. Masāṇānīti missakacelāni. Chavadussānīti matasarīrato chaḍḍitavatthāni. Erakatiṇādīni vā ganthetvā katanivāsanāni. Paṃsukūlānīti pathaviyaṃ chaḍḍitanantakāni. Tirīṭānīti rukkhattacavatthāni. Ajinanti ajinamigacammaṃ. Ajinakkhipanti tadeva majjhe phālitaṃ. Sakhurakantipi vadanti. Kusacīranti kusatiṇāni ganthetvā katacīrakaṃ. Vākacīraphalakacīresupi eseva nayo. Kesakambalanti manussakesehi katakambalaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, yāni kānici tantāvutānaṃ vatthānaṃ kesakambalo tesaṃ patikuṭṭho akkhāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 3.138). Vāḷakambalanti assavāḷādīhi katakambalaṃ. Ulūkapakkhanti ulūkapattāni ganthetvā katanivāsanaṃ. Ubbhaṭṭhakoti uddhaṃ ṭhitako.
致力于蹲踞苦行的人,就是专心投入蹲踞这种精进修行的人。即使走路的时候,他也是蹲着,一跳一跳地往前走。以荆棘为卧处的人,就是把铁荆棘或者天然荆棘钉在地上,在上面铺开皮革,然后在上面做站立、经行等事情。卧处,就是即使睡觉的时候,也只在那个地方铺卧具。傍晚第三次,就是傍晚的第三次。早上、中午、傍晚,一天三次我要洗掉罪恶,于是就专心投入入水沐浴的修行,安住其中。巴利
Ukkuṭikappadhānamanuyuttoti ukkuṭikavīriyaṃ anuyutto. Gacchantopi ukkuṭikova hutvā uppatitvā uppatitvā gacchati. Kaṇṭakāpassayikoti ayakaṇṭake vā pakatikaṇṭake vā bhūmiyaṃ koṭṭetvā tattha cammaṃ attharitvā ṭhānacaṅkamādīni karoti. Seyyanti sayantopi tattheva seyyaṃ kappeti. Sāyaṃ tatiyamassāti sāyatatiyakaṃ. ‘‘Pāto, majjhanhike, sāyanti divasassa tikkhattuṃ pāpaṃ pavāhessāmī’’ti udakorohanānuyogaṃ anuyutto viharati.
175 175. “折磨他人的人”:就是折磨他人的人。他投入于折磨他人、折磨折磨他人的人。“屠羊者等”里面——所谓“羊”,指的就是山羊;杀羊的人就叫屠羊者。“屠猪者等”也是同样的道理。“猎人”:指凶残、粗暴的人。“杀鱼的人”:指捕鱼的人、渔夫。“狱卒”:指看守监狱的人。“残酷行业”:指凶残的行业。巴利
175. Paraṃ tapatīti parantapo. Paresaṃ paritāpanānuyogaṃ paraparitāpanānuyogaṃ. Orabbhikādīsu – urabbhā vuccanti eḷakā. Urabbhe hanatīti orabbhiko. Sūkarikādīsupi – eseva nayo. Luddoti dāruṇo kakkhaḷo. Macchaghātakoti macchabandho kevaṭṭo. Bandhanāgārikoti bandhanāgāragopako. Kurūrakammantāti dāruṇakammantā.
176 176. “灌顶者”:就是通过刹帝利灌顶仪式,被灌顶在头顶上的人。“在城东”:就是从城向东的方向。“集会堂”:就是祭祀的厅堂。“穿着粗兽皮”:就是穿着带蹄的羚羊皮。“以酥油”:就是用酥和油。因为除了酥以外,其余任何一种油脂都叫做油。“搔痒时”:因为指甲已经剪掉,到了需要搔痒的时候,就用那张兽皮来搔痒。“无间隔地”:就是没有铺开。“同色牛犊”:就是和母牛颜色相同的牛犊。如果母牛是白色的,牛犊也是白色;如果母牛是花色的或红色的,牛犊也是那样的——这就是“同色牛犊”。“国王如是说”:就是那位国王这样说。“壮牛犊”:已超过幼犊阶段、强壮的牛犊。小母牛也是同样道理。“为敷草”:为作围栏及铺设祭祀场地而成的草。巴利
176.Muddhāvasittoti khattiyābhisekena muddhani abhisitto. Puratthimena nagarassāti nagarato puratthimadisāya. Sandhāgāranti yaññasālaṃ . Kharājinaṃ nivāsetvāti sakhuraṃ ajinacammaṃ nivāsetvā. Sappitelenāti sappinā ca telena ca. Ṭhapetvā hi sappiṃ avaseso yo koci sneho telanti vuccati. Kaṇḍuvamānoti nakhānaṃ chinnattā kaṇḍuvitabbakāle tena kaṇḍuvamāno. Anantarahitāyāti asanthatāya. Sarūpavacchāyāti sadisavacchāya. Sace gāvī setā hoti, vacchopi setakova sace kabarā vā, rattā vā, vacchopi tādisovāti – evaṃ sarūpavacchāya. So evamāhāti so rājā evaṃ vadeti. Vacchatarāti taruṇavacchakabhāvaṃ atikkantā balavavacchā. Vacchatarīsupi eseva nayo. Barihisatthāyāti parikkhepakaraṇatthāya ceva yaññabhūmiyaṃ attharaṇatthāya ca.
177 “在现世中”就是指在这一生、这个身体里。“无渴者”:渴爱被称为“渴”,他没有渴爱,所以叫无渴者。因为一切烦恼都已止息,所以是寂灭者。因为内心没有灼烧的烦恼,所以是清凉的,成为清凉者。他体验禅那、道、果和涅槃的快乐,所以是体验快乐者。“以自己成为梵天”就是以自己成为最殊胜者。巴利
177.Diṭṭheva dhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve. Nicchātoti chātaṃ vuccati taṇhā, sā assa natthīti nicchāto. Sabbakilesānaṃ nibbutattā nibbuto. Anto tāpanakilesānaṃ abhāvā sītalo jātoti sītībhūto. Jhānamaggaphalanibbānasukhāni paṭisaṃvedetīti sukhappaṭisaṃvedī. Brahmabhūtena attanāti seṭṭhabhūtena attanā.
为了从佛陀出世开始说明这个人,这里说了“此处如来”等话。其中,“如来”是以八种理由称世尊为如来:如是而来,所以是如来;如是而去,所以是如来;以如实之相而来,所以是如来;如实觉悟真实之法,所以是如来;以如实见,所以是如来;以如实说,所以是如来;以如实行,所以是如来;以超胜之义,所以是如来。“阿拉汉、正自觉者”等词,在《清净道论》中已经详细解释过了。“彼法”是指具有上述那样品质的法。“居士或其他[人]听闻”——为什么首先提到居士?因为居士慢心已除,而且人数众多。通常,从刹帝利家族出家的人,会依靠出身而生起慢心;从婆罗门家族出家的人,会依靠咒术而生起慢心;从低种姓家族出家的人,因为自己出身低贱,无法站稳脚跟。然而,居士之子们是用腋下流汗、背上结出盐花的方式耕种土地的,因为没有那样的慢心,所以慢心和骄慢都已消除。他们出家之后,不摆慢心,也不逞骄慢,尽自己所能学习佛语,修习毗婆舍那,能够证得阿拉汉果。而从其他家族出家的人并不多,居士出家的人却很多。因此,由于慢心已除且人数众多,所以首先提到居士。巴利
Imaṃ pana puggalaṃ buddhuppādato paṭṭhāya dassetuṃ – idha tathāgatotiādimāha. Tattha tathāgatoti aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā tathāgato – tathā āgatoti tathāgato, tathā gatoti tathāgato, tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato, tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato, tathadassitāya tathāgato, tathāvāditāya tathāgato, tathākāritāya tathāgato, abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgatoti. Arahaṃ sammāsambuddhotiādīni visuddhimagge vitthāritāneva. Taṃ dhammanti taṃ vuttappakārasampadaṃ dhammaṃ. Suṇāti gahapati vāti kasmā paṭhamaṃ gahapatiṃ niddisati? Nihatamānattā ussannattā ca. Yebhuyyena hi khattiyakulato pabbajitā jātiṃ nissāya mānaṃ karonti. Brāhmaṇakulā pabbajitā mante nissāya mānaṃ karonti. Hīnajaccakulā pabbajitā attano vijātitāya patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkonti. Gahapatidārakā pana kacchehi sedaṃ muñcantehi piṭṭhiyā loṇaṃ pupphamānāya bhūmiṃ kasitvā tādisassa mānassa abhāvato nihatamānadappā honti. Te pabbajitvā mānaṃ vā dappaṃ vā akatvā yathābalaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggahetvā vipassanāya kammaṃ karontā sakkonti arahatte patiṭṭhātuṃ. Itarehi ca kulehi nikkhamitvā pabbajitā nāma na bahukā, gahapatikāva bahukā. Iti nihatamānattā ussannattā ca paṭhamaṃ gahapatiṃ niddisatīti.
“或者在某一个别的家族中”,意思是说在其余家族中的某一个里。“再生”就是出生。“在如来那里获得信心”,意思是听闻了清净的法之后,对法主如来生起信心:“那位世尊确实是正自觉者。” “就这样思量”,意思是这样观察。“居家生活是拥挤的”,即使夫妻二人住在六十肘宽的房子里,或者住在相隔一百由旬的地方,从有牵挂、有障碍这一点来说,居家生活仍然是拥挤的。“尘垢之路”,在大注疏里说是贪欲之尘等生起的地方。也可以说成“来路”。“像虚空一样”,因为不执着的缘故,所以像虚空。出家人即使住在尖顶楼阁、宝石宫殿、天宫等门窗紧闭的隐蔽之处,也根本不执着、不黏着、不被系缚。因此说:“出家是虚空。”巴利
Aññatarasmiṃ vāti itaresaṃ vā kulānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ. Paccājātoti patijāto. Tathāgate saddhaṃ paṭilabhatīti parisuddhaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā dhammassāmimhi tathāgate ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā’’ti saddhaṃ paṭilabhati. Iti paṭisañcikkhatīti evaṃ paccavekkhati. Sambādho gharāvāsoti sacepi saṭṭhihatthe ghare yojanasatantarepi vā dve jāyampatikā vasanti, tathāpi nesaṃ sakiñcanasapalibodhaṭṭhena gharāvāso sambādhoyeva. Rajopathoti rāgarajādīnaṃ uṭṭhānaṭṭhānanti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Āgamanapathotipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Alagganaṭṭhena abbhokāso viyāti abbhokāso. Pabbajito hi kūṭāgāraratanapāsāde ca devavimānādīsu ca supihitadvāravātapānesu paṭicchannesu vasantopi neva laggati, na sajjati, na bajjhati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘abbhokāso pabbajjā’’ti.
再者——居家生活是逼窄的,因为没有行善的空间。它像一条尘土飞扬的道路,是不加遮盖的垃圾堆,是烦恼之尘积聚的地方。而出家则像开阔的露地,因为可以随自己的意愿获得行善的空间。在这里,“这不容易……出家”这一段,简要的意思是:这三学梵行,必须连一天也不间断地修习,直到临终一念,所以是绝对圆满的;必须连一天也不被烦恼的污垢弄脏,直到临终一念,所以是绝对清净的。应当像磨光的贝壳、像洗净的贝壳那样来修持。这对一个住在家里、生活在家庭中间的人来说,不容易做到绝对圆满……修持——“我何不剃掉头发和胡须,穿上染成黄褐色的、适合修梵行者的衣服,从家里出来,出家过没有家的生活呢?”在这里,因为适合在家的耕田、经商等事业称为“家业”,而出家里没有这些,所以应当知道出家就是“没有家”。那就是没有家的生活。“出家”就是去实行。“少”是指财产不到一千,就叫少;从一千起就算多。从没有系缚的意义上说,“亲属”就是亲属圈子。那也是在二十人以下算少,从二十人起算多。巴利
Apica – sambādho gharāvāso kusalakiriyāya okāsābhāvato. Rajopatho asaṃvutasaṅkāraṭṭhānaṃ viya rajānaṃ kilesarajānaṃ sannipātaṭṭhānato. Abbhokāso pabbajjā kusalakiriyāya yathāsukhaṃ okāsasambhāvato. Nayidaṃ sukaraṃ…pe… pabbajeyyanti ettha ayaṃ saṅkhepakathā – yadetaṃ sikkhattayabrahmacariyaṃ ekampi divasaṃ akhaṇḍaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāya ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ. Ekadivasampi ca kilesamalena amalinaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāya ekantaparisuddhaṃ. Saṅkhalikhitaṃ likhitasaṅkhasadisaṃ dhotasaṅkhasappaṭibhāgaṃ caritabbaṃ. Idaṃ na sukaraṃ agāraṃ ajjhāvasatā agāramajjhe vasantena ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ…pe… carituṃ – ‘‘yaṃnūnāhaṃ kese ca massuñca ohāretvā kasāyarasapītatāya kāsāyāni brahmacariyaṃ carantānaṃ anucchavikāni vatthāni acchādetvā paridahitvā agārasmā nikkhamitvā anagāriyaṃ pabbajeyya’’nti. Ettha ca yasmā agārassa hitaṃ kasivāṇijjādikammaṃ ‘‘agāriya’’nti vuccati, tañca pabbajjāya natthi, tasmā pabbajjā ‘‘anagāriya’’nti ñātabbā. Taṃ anagāriyaṃ. Pabbajeyyanti paṭipajjeyyaṃ. Appaṃ vāti sahassato heṭṭhā bhogakkhandho appo nāma hoti, sahassato paṭṭhāya mahā. Abandhanaṭṭhena ñātiyeva ñātiparivaṭṭo. Sopi vīsatiyā heṭṭhā appo hoti, vīsatiyā paṭṭhāya mahā.
178 比丘具足修学与共住:所谓比丘以增上戒为内容的修学,以及他们共同生活、同一活命、和合共住,也就是世尊所制定的学处所摄的共住。在这两者上,以正在修学的状态而具足,就是比丘具足修学与共住。具足的意思是:圆满修学、不违越共住,也就是达到了这两者。在断除杀生等句中,杀生等的说明下面已经详细讲过。断除,就是舍弃这个名为杀生思的破戒行为。防护,就是从舍弃的那一刻起,对那破戒行为远离、克制。放下棍棒、放下刀杖,意思是:不再为了伤害他人而拿起棍棒或刀杖,所以是放下棍棒、放下刀杖。这里除了棍棒之外,其余一切能毁灭众生的器具都应理解为刀杖。但比丘们拿着剪刀、牙签或胡椒粒走来走去,并不是为了伤害他人,所以仍然算放下棍棒、放下刀杖。有惭,就是具备以厌恶恶行为特征的惭。具足悲悯,就是具备悲悯、慈心。怜悯一切众生,就是以利益怜悯一切众生。意思是:由于那份悲悯,对一切众生都有利益之心。住,就是行动、护持。巴利 注疏 1
178.Bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpannoti yā bhikkhūnaṃ adhisīlasaṅkhātā sikkhā, tañca. Yattha cete saha jīvanti, ekajīvikā sabhāgavuttino honti, taṃ bhagavatā paññattasikkhāpadasaṅkhātaṃ sājīvañca. Tattha sikkhanabhāvena samāpannoti bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno. Samāpannoti sikkhaṃ paripūrento sājīvañca avītikkamanto hutvā tadubhayaṃ upagatoti attho. Pāṇātipātaṃ pahāyātiādīsu pāṇātipātādikathā heṭṭhā vitthāritā eva. Pahāyāti imaṃ pāṇātipātacetanāsaṅkhātaṃ dussīlyaṃ pajahitvā. Paṭivirato hotīti pahīnakālato paṭṭhāya tato dussīlyato orato viratova hoti. Nihitadaṇḍo nihitasatthoti parūpaghātatthāya daṇḍaṃ vā satthaṃ vā ādāya avattanato nikkhittadaṇḍo ceva nikkhittasattho cāti attho. Ettha ca ṭhapetvā daṇḍaṃ, sabbampi avasesaṃ upakaraṇaṃ sattānaṃ vināsanabhāvato ‘sattha’nti veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ pana bhikkhū kattaradaṇḍaṃ vā dantakaṭṭhavāsiṃ vā pipphalikaṃ vā gahetvā vicaranti, na taṃ parūpaghātatthāya. Tasmā nihitadaṇḍā nihitasatthātveva saṅkhaṃ gacchanti. Lajjīti pāpajigucchanalakkhaṇāya lajjāya samannāgato. Dayāpannoti dayaṃ mettacittataṃ āpanno. Sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampīti sabbe pāṇabhūte hitena anukampako. Tāya dayāpannatāya sabbesaṃ pāṇabhūtānaṃ hitacittakoti attho. Viharatīti iriyati, pāleti.
只取别人给的东西,就是“只取所与”。心里也只想要别人给的东西,就是“只期待所与”。偷取,就是“盗”。不是用偷盗的方式,而是因为不偷盗、以清净的方式;以自身,也就是以自己的这个身体。意思是说,他让这个身体保持清净而生活。巴利
Dinnameva ādiyatīti dinnādāyī. Cittenapi dinnameva paṭikaṅkhatīti dinnapāṭikaṅkhī. Thenetīti theno. Na thenena athenena. Athenattāyeva sucibhūtena. Attanāti attabhāvena. Athenaṃ sucibhūtaṃ attabhāvaṃ katvā viharatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
非梵行就是低劣的行为。行持梵天般最殊胜的行为,就叫梵行者。远离行者,就是远离非梵行的人。淫欲:由于被贪欲缠缚而与同类众生交合,所以从事者获得淫欲者的称呼;由于这是被如此称呼的人所从事的,因此名为淫欲,属于非正法。村法,就是村民的做法。巴利
Abrahmacariyanti aseṭṭhacariyaṃ. Brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ ācāraṃ caratīti brahmacārī. Ārācārīti abrahmacariyato dūracārī. Methunāti rāgapariyuṭṭhānavasena sadisattā methunakāti laddhavohārehi paṭisevitabbato methunāti saṅkhaṃ gatā asaddhammā. Gāmadhammāti gāmavāsīnaṃ dhammā.
说真实语的人,就叫真实语者。用真实来连接真实、让真实与真实相契合,就叫真实连贯者。意思是,他中间不会夹杂妄语。如果有人有时候说妄语,有时候说真话,因为被妄语隔断,他的真话就不能和真话连贯起来,所以他不算是真实连贯者。但这个人不是那样,即使为了活命也不说妄语,只用真实来连接真实,所以是真实连贯者。Theto 是坚固的意思,也就是说话坚固。有一种人,像姜黄的颜色一样不牢靠,像插在灰堆里的木桩,像放在马背上的葫芦,不是说话坚固。另一种人,像石上刻字,像因陀罗柱,是说话坚固。即使有人用剑砍他的头,他也不说两种话。这种人称为坚固者。Paccayiko 是值得相信的意思,就是可信赖。有一种人不是可信赖的。有人问:「这话是谁说的?是某某说的。」他就会说:「不要相信他的话。」另一种人是可信赖的。有人问:「这话是谁说的?是某某说的。」他就会说:「如果是他说的,这就是标准,现在不必再考察了,就是这样。」这种人称为可信赖者。Avisaṃvādako lokassa 的意思是,由于那样的说真实语,他不欺骗世间。巴利
Saccaṃ vadatīti saccavādī. Saccena saccaṃ sandahati ghaṭetīti saccasandho. Na antarantarā musā vadatīti attho. Yo hi puriso kadāci musā vadati, kadāci saccaṃ, tassa musāvādena antaritattā saccaṃ saccena na ghaṭīyati, tasmā na so saccasandho. Ayaṃ pana na tādiso. Jīvitahetupi musā avatvā saccena saccaṃ sandahatiyevāti saccasandho. Thetoti thiro, thirakathoti attho. Eko hi puggalo haliddirāgo viya, thusarāsimhi nikhātakhāṇuko viya, assapiṭṭhe ṭhapitakumbhaṇḍamiva ca, na thirakatho hoti. Eko pāsāṇalekhā viya, indakhīlo viya ca thirakatho hoti. Asinā sīse chindantepi dve kathā na katheti. Ayaṃ vuccati theto. Paccayikoti pattiyāyitabbako, saddhāyikoti attho. Ekacco hi puggalo na paccayiko hoti. ‘Idaṃ kena vuttaṃ? Asukenā’ti vutte ‘mā tassa vacanaṃ saddahathā’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Eko paccayiko hoti. ‘Idaṃ kena vuttaṃ? Asukenā’ti vutte ‘yadi tena vuttaṃ, idameva pamāṇaṃ, idāni upaparikkhitabbaṃ natthi, evameva ida’nti vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Ayaṃ vuccati paccayiko. Avisaṃvādako lokassāti tāya saccavāditāya lokaṃ na visaṃvādetīti attho.
为了分裂他们:意思是,对那些在“从这里听闻”这种说法所指的人面前听闻之人,为了让他们分裂。或者,让已分裂的人和合者:如果两位朋友,或者同一位亲教师等的人,因为某种原因而分裂了,他就一个一个地走近他们,说:“你们出生在这样的家族,这么博学多闻,这样做不合适”等等,从而促成和合,是使人和合者。不给予者:是不给予和合者。看见两个和合的人后,说:“你们出生在这样的家族,具备这样的功德,这样做才合适”等等,从而促成坚固,这是其含义。和合乐者:和合乐者,意指若有和合,他才愿意住。也作samaggarāmo,这是巴利语。就是这个意思。和合喜者:乐于和合者,意指舍弃他们后,他连去往别处都不愿意。和合喜者:看到或听到和合就欢喜。说和合之语:凡所说之语使众生和合,他就说那显示和合功德之语,不说别的。巴利
Imesaṃbhedāyāti yesaṃ ito sutvāti vuttānaṃ santike sutaṃ, tesaṃ bhedāya. Bhinnānaṃ vā sandhātāti dvinnaṃ mittānaṃ vā samānupajjhāyakādīnaṃ vā kenacideva kāraṇena bhinnānaṃ ekamekaṃ upasaṅkamitvā – ‘tumhākaṃ īdise kule jātānaṃ, evaṃ bahussutānaṃ idaṃ na yutta’ntiādīni vatvā sandhānaṃ kattā. Anuppadātāti sandhānānuppadātā. Dve jane samagge disvā – ‘tumhākaṃ evarūpe kule jātānaṃ, evarūpehi guṇehi samannāgatānaṃ anucchavikameta’ntiādīni vatvā daḷhīkammaṃ kattāti attho. Samaggo ārāmo assāti samaggārāmo. Yattha samaggā natthi, tattha vasitumpi na icchatīti attho. Samaggarāmotipi pāḷi. Ayameva attho. Samaggaratoti samaggesu rato. Te pahāya aññatra gantumpi na icchatīti attho. Samagge disvāpi sutvāpi nandatīti samagganandī. Samaggakaraṇiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitāti yā vācā satte samaggeyeva karoti, taṃ sāmaggīguṇaparidīpakameva vācaṃ bhāsati, na itaranti.
在合适的时间才说话,所以叫“适时语者”。意思是:先看清该说的时机,然后才说。说的是真实的、如实的、符合事实的、本来如此的内容,所以叫“真实语者”。只依据今生和来世的利益来说,所以叫“义利语者”。只依据九种出世间法来说,所以叫“法语者”。只依据防护律仪和断除律仪来说,所以叫“律语者”。所谓“藏处”,就是安放的地方。有藏处,就是具有安放之处。意思是说,应把话安放在心里才说。关于“适时”:即使说这样的话,也不会想着“我要说有藏处的话”而在不恰当的时候说,而是看清恰当的时机才说,这就是它的意思。“有譬喻”就是带有比喻、带有理由。“有边际”就是指出界限。意思是说,让界限清清楚楚地显示出来而说。“相应义利”是说:用种种方式分析也无法穷尽,因此说的是具足义利的话;或者说,那位义利语者所说的义利,因为与那个义利相应,所以说的是与义利相应的话。意思是说,不是放下一个而另说一个。巴利
Kālena vadatīti kālavādī. Vattabbayuttakālaṃ sallakkhetvā vadatīti attho. Bhūtaṃ tathaṃ tacchaṃ sabhāvameva vadatīti bhūtavādī. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikatthasannissitameva katvā vadatīti atthavādī. Navalokuttaradhammasannissitaṃ katvā vadatīti dhammavādī. Saṃvaravinayapahānavinayasannissitaṃ katvā vadatīti vinayavādī. Nidhānaṃ vuccati ṭhapanokāso. Nidhānamassa atthīti nidhānavatī. Hadaye nidhātabbayuttakaṃ vācaṃ bhāsitāti attho. Kālenāti evarūpiṃ bhāsamānopi ca ‘‘ahaṃ nidhānavatiṃ vācaṃ bhāsissāmī’’ti na akālena bhāsati. Yuttakālaṃ pana sallakkhetvāva bhāsatīti attho. Sāpadesanti saupamaṃ, sakāraṇanti attho. Pariyantavatinti paricchedaṃ dassetvā. Yathāssā paricchedo paññāyati, evaṃ bhāsatīti attho. Atthasaṃhitanti anekehipi nayehi vibhajantena pariyādātuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya atthasampannaṃ bhāsati. Yaṃ vā so atthavādī atthaṃ vadati, tena atthena saṃhitattā atthasaṃhitaṃ vācaṃ bhāsati. Na aññaṃ nikkhipitvā aññaṃ bhāsatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
179 损害种子类和生物类,就是损害五种种子类——根种、茎种、节种、芽种、种子种——以及任何青草、树木等生物类。意思是以切割、破坏、煮烧等方式加以摧残,而远离这些行为。一食者,是指早餐和晚餐这两餐。其中,早餐以正午之前为限,另一餐从正午之后到黎明之前。所以,即使在正午之前吃十次,也仍然算是一食者。针对这一点才说“一食者”。夜间的进食叫夜食,远离它就叫离夜食。过了正午直到日落之间的进食,叫做非时食,因为远离它,所以是离非时食者。与教法不相符、成为障碍的观看,就是观看障碍。以自己跳舞、让别人跳舞等方式,舞蹈、歌唱、奏乐,甚至以让孔雀跳舞等方式进行的舞蹈等,以及观看这些成为障碍的舞蹈等,就是观看舞蹈、歌唱、奏乐等障碍。因为舞蹈等,无论自己去做、让别人去做,还是适合去观看,对比丘和比丘尼都不允许。在花鬘等中,花鬘就是任何一种花,香就是任何一种香料,涂香就是使皮肤变色之物。其中,佩戴的叫持,填补不足处的叫装饰,以香气和肤色而享受的叫庄严。处就是原因。因此,以恶戒之心,大众去做那些戴花鬘等事,而远离这些,就是其含义。高床,是指超过尺寸的床;大床,是指不合规定的铺设,远离这些就是其含义。金,就是黄金;银,就是钱币、铜钱、漆钱、木钱等流通使用的东西。远离接受这两种东西,就是既不自己拿取,也不让别人拿取,也不接受别人放置在那里的东西。巴利 注疏 1
179.Bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhāti mūlabījaṃ, khandhabījaṃ, phaḷubījaṃ, aggabījaṃ bījabījanti pañcavidhassa bījagāmassa ceva yassa kassaci nīlatiṇarukkhādikassa bhūtagāmassa ca samārambhā. Chedanabhedanapacanādibhāvena vikopanā paṭiviratoti attho. Ekabhattikoti pātarāsabhattaṃ, sāyamāsabhattanti dve bhattāni. Tesu pātarāsabhattaṃ antomajjhanhikena paricchinnaṃ. Itaraṃ majjhanhikato uddhaṃ antoaruṇena. Tasmā antomajjhanhike dasakkhattuṃ bhuñjamānopi ekabhattikova hoti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ekabhattikoti. Rattiyā bhojanaṃ ratti, tato uparatoti rattūparato. Atikkante majjhanhike yāva sūriyasatthaṅgamanā bhojanaṃ vikālabhojanaṃ nāma, tato viratattā virato vikālabhojanā. Sāsanassa ananulomattā visūkaṃ paṭāṇībhūtaṃ dassananti visūkadassanaṃ. Attanā naccananaccāpanādivasena naccā ca gītā ca vāditā ca antamaso mayūranaccanāpanādivasenapi pavattānaṃ naccādīnaṃ visūkabhūtā dassanā cāti naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā. Naccādīni hi attanā payojetuṃ vā parehi payojāpetuṃ vā yuttāni passituṃ vā neva bhikkhūnaṃ na bhikkhunīnaṃ vaṭṭanti. Mālādīsu – mālāti yaṃkiñci pupphaṃ. Gandhanti yaṃkiñci gandhajātaṃ. Vilepananti chavirāgakaraṇaṃ. Tattha piḷandhanto dhāreti nāma. Ūnaṭṭhānaṃ pūrento maṇḍeti nāma. Gandhavasena chavirāgavasena ca sādiyanto vibhūseti nāma. Ṭhānaṃ vuccati kāraṇaṃ. Tasmā yāya dussīlyacetanāya tāni mālādhāraṇādīni mahājano karoti, tato paṭiviratoti attho. Uccāsayanaṃ vuccati pamāṇātikkantaṃ. Mahāsayanaṃ akappiyasanthataṃ, tato paṭiviratoti attho. Jātarūpanti suvaṇṇaṃ. Rajatanti kahāpaṇo, lohamāsako, jatumāsako, dārumāsakoti ye vohāraṃ gacchanti. Tassa ubhayassāpi paṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato, neva naṃ uggaṇhāti, na uggaṇhāpeti, na upanikkhittaṃ sādiyatīti attho.
接受生谷,是指接受七种生谷:稻、谷、大麦、小麦、黍、稗、䅟子。不只是接受这些谷物,比丘连碰都不可以。接受生肉,在这里是指:除了特别允许的情况,比丘接受生的鱼和肉是不可以的,但碰不算犯。接受女人和少女,这里“女人”指已经和男人有过关系的;其他的叫“少女”。接受她们或碰她们,都是不合法的。接受奴婢,这里是指就奴婢本身来说,接受他们是不可以的;但如果有人说“我供养净人”“我供养园丁”,那就可以。关于山羊等,乃至田地、地基,合法与非法的判定应按律制来审察。其中,“田”指生长谷类作物之处,“地基”指生长豆类等作物之处,或者两者都生长之处称为“田”,为种植而尚未开垦的土地称为“地基”。这里以田、地基为首,水池等也包括在内。巴利
Āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇāti sālivīhiyavagodhumakaṅguvarakakudrūsakasaṅkhātassa sattavidhassāpi āmakadhaññassa paṭiggahaṇā. Na kevalañca etesaṃ paṭiggahaṇameva, āmasanampi bhikkhūnaṃ na vaṭṭatiyeva. Āmakamaṃsapaṭiggahaṇāti ettha aññatra odissa anuññātā āmakamacchamaṃsānaṃ paṭiggahaṇameva bhikkhūnaṃ na vaṭṭati, no āmasanaṃ. Itthikumārikapaṭiggahaṇāti ettha itthīti purisantaragatā. Itarā kumārikā nāma. Tāsaṃ paṭiggahaṇampi āmasanampi akappiyameva. Dāsidāsapaṭiggahaṇāti ettha dāsidāsavaseneva tesaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vaṭṭati. ‘Kappiyakārakaṃ dammi’, ‘ārāmikaṃ dammī’ti evaṃ vutte pana vaṭṭati. Ajeḷakādīsupi khettavatthupariyosānesu kappiyākappiyanayo vinayavasena upaparikkhitabbo. Tattha khettaṃ nāma yasmiṃ pubbaṇṇaṃ ruhati. Vatthu nāma yasmiṃ aparaṇṇaṃ ruhati. Yattha vā ubhayampi ruhati taṃ khettaṃ. Tadatthāya akatabhūmibhāgo vatthu. Khettavatthusīsena cettha vāpitaḷākādīnipi saṅgahitāneva.
信使,指的是替人传信跑腿的差事。带着在家人托付的信件或口信,到处奔走,这就是信使。被差遣,指的是被派到别人家里做短程跑腿。随从,指的是做这两种事情。所以,这里应该理解为对信使和被差遣这两类事务的随从。“买卖”就是买和卖。关于秤上作弊等——“作弊”就是欺骗。其中,秤上作弊有四种:形作弊、肢作弊、执作弊、覆作弊。其中,形作弊是指把两个秤做成一样的形状,收进时用大秤,给出时用小秤。肢作弊是指收进时用手按后部,给出时按前部。执作弊是指收进时握持秤绳的根部,给出时握持顶端,覆作弊是指将秤杆掏空,内部填入铅粉,收进时将有铅粉的一端放在后部,给出时放在前部。巴利
Dūteyyaṃ vuccati dūtakammaṃ. Gihīnaṃ pahitaṃ paṇṇaṃ vā sāsanaṃ vā gahetvā tattha tattha gamanaṃ . Pahīṇagamanaṃ vuccati paragharaṃ pesitassa khuddakagamanaṃ. Anuyogo nāma tadubhayakaraṇaṃ. Tasmā dūteyyapahīṇagamanānaṃ anugoti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Kayavikkayāti kayā ca vikkayā ca. Tulākūṭādīsu – kūṭanti vañcanaṃ. Tattha tulākūṭaṃ nāma rūpakūṭaṃ, aṅgakūṭaṃ gahaṇakūṭaṃ, paṭicchannakūṭanti catubbidhaṃ hoti. Tattha rūpakūṭaṃ nāma dve tulā samarūpā katvā gaṇhanto mahatiyā gaṇhāti, dadanto khuddikāya deti. Aṅgakūṭaṃ nāma gaṇhanto pacchābhāge hatthena tulaṃ akkamati, dadanto pubbabhāge. Gahaṇakūṭaṃ nāma gaṇhanto mūle rajjuṃ gaṇhāti, dadanto agge. Paṭicchannakūṭaṃ nāma tulaṃ susiraṃ katvā anto ayacuṇṇaṃ pakkhipitvā gaṇhanto taṃ pacchābhāge karoti, dadanto aggabhāge.
“铜器”是指金钵。用这种手段骗人,就叫“铜器欺”。怎么骗呢?先做一个金钵,再把另外两三个铜钵做成金色的。然后到乡下去,走进某户有钱人家,说“买金器吗”。对方问价钱时,他们就表示愿意卖得便宜些。接着对方说“怎么知道这些是金的呢”,他们就说“你们检验一下再拿”,于是把金钵在石头上磨一磨,然后把所有钵都交给对方,走掉了。巴利
Kaṃso vuccati suvaṇṇapāti. Tāya vañcanaṃ kaṃsakūṭaṃ. Kathaṃ? Ekaṃ suvaṇṇapātiṃ katvā aññā dve tisso lohapātiyo suvaṇṇavaṇṇā karonti, tato janapadaṃ gantvā kiñcideva aḍḍhakulaṃ pavisitvā suvaṇṇabhājanāni kiṇathā’ti vatvā agghe pucchite samagghataraṃ dātukāmā honti. Tato tehi ‘kathaṃ imesaṃ suvaṇṇabhāvo jānitabbo’ti vutte ‘vīmaṃsitvā gaṇhathā’ti suvaṇṇapātiṃ pāsāṇe ghaṃsitvā sabbapātiyo datvā gacchanti.
所谓“量器作弊”有三种:在器底做手脚、在堆尖上做手脚、在量绳上做手脚。
其中,在器底做手脚,出现在量酥油、油等东西的时候。收进来时,用底部有孔的量器,嘴上说“慢慢倒”,实际上让大量液体漏进下面的容器里再收下。给出去时,就把孔堵住,飞快地装满再给对方。
在堆尖上做手脚,出现在量芝麻、米等东西的时候。收进来时,慢慢把堆尖堆高再收下。给出去时,飞快地装满,然后把堆尖削掉再给对方。
在量绳上做手脚,出现在丈量田地、地基的时候。那些拿不到贿赂的人,丈量时会把本来不大的田地说成很大。巴利
Mānakūṭaṃ nāma hadayabhedasikhābhedarajjubhedavasena tividhaṃ hoti. Tattha hadayabhedo sappitelādiminanakāle labbhati. Tāni hi gaṇhanto heṭṭhā chiddena mānena ‘saṇikaṃ āsiñcā’ti vatvā antobhājane bahuṃ paggharāpetvā gaṇhāti. Dadanto chiddaṃ pidhāya sīghaṃ pūretvā deti. Sikhābhedo tilataṇḍulādiminanakāle labbhati. Tāni hi gaṇhanto saṇikaṃ sikhaṃ ussāpetvā gaṇhāti. Dadanto vegena pūretvā sikhaṃ chindanto deti. Rajjubhedo khettavatthuminanakāle labbhati. Lañjaṃ alabhantā hi khettaṃ amahantampi mahantaṃ katvā minanti.
关于敲诈等——“敲诈”是指把没有主人的东西说成有主人的,从而收受贿赂。“欺骗”是指用各种手段欺骗他人。这里有一件事:据说有个猎人抓到一只鹿和一只小鹿,带着回来。一个骗子问他:“喂,鹿值多少钱?小鹿值多少钱?”猎人回答说:“鹿值两个迦哈波那,小鹿值一个。”骗子就付了一个迦哈波那,拿走小鹿,走了一小段路又折回来,说:“喂,我不要小鹿了,把鹿给我。”猎人说:“那你得给两个迦哈波那。”骗子说:“喂,我不是先给过你一个迦哈波那了吗?”猎人说:“是,给过了。”骗子就说:“那我把小鹿还给你,这样一来,那一个迦哈波那加上这只值一个迦哈波那的小鹿,正好就是两个迦哈波那。”猎人觉得“他说得有道理”,就收回小鹿,把鹿给了他。巴利
Ukkoṭanādīsu – ukkoṭananti assāmike sāmike kātuṃ lañjaggahaṇaṃ. Vañcananti tehi tehi upāyehi paresaṃ vañcanaṃ. Tatridamekaṃ vatthu – eko kira luddako migañca migapotakañca gahetvā āgacchati. Tameko dhutto – ‘‘kiṃ bho migo agghati, kiṃ migapotako’’ti āha. ‘‘Migo dve kahāpaṇe, migapotako eka’’nti ca vutte kahāpaṇaṃ datvā migapotakaṃ gahetvā thokaṃ gantvā nivatto , ‘‘na me bho migapotakena attho, migaṃ me dehī’’ti āha. Tena hi ‘‘dve kahāpaṇe dehī’’ti. So āha – ‘‘nanu te, bho, mayā paṭhamaṃ eko kahāpaṇo dinno’’ti? ‘‘Āma dinno’’ti. Idampi migapotakaṃ gaṇha, evaṃ so ca kahāpaṇo ayañca kahāpaṇagghaṇako migapotakoti dve kahāpaṇā bhavissantīti. So ‘‘kāraṇaṃ vadatī’’ti sallakkhetvā migapotakaṃ gahetvā migaṃ adāsīti.
欺诈,是指通过诡计或幻术,把不是装饰品的说成装饰品,把不是宝石的说成宝石,把不是黄金的说成黄金,用仿冒的东西来骗人。曲行,就是歪曲不正的做法。这也是对上面说的敲诈等行为的称呼。因此,这里的含义应当理解为:敲诈曲行、欺骗曲行、欺诈曲行。有些人把“展示一样东西却交付另一样东西”叫作曲行,但那其实已经包含在欺骗里了。巴利
Nikatīti yogavasena vā māyāvasena vā apāmaṅgaṃ pāmaṅganti, amaṇiṃ maṇīti, asuvaṇṇaṃ suvaṇṇanti katvā patirūpakena vañcanaṃ. Sāciyogoti kuṭilayogo. Etesaṃyeva ukkoṭanādīnametaṃ nāmaṃ. Tasmā ukkoṭanasāciyogo vañcanasāciyogo nikatisāciyogoti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Keci aññaṃ dassetvā aññassa parivattanaṃ ‘sāciyogo’ti vadanti. Taṃ pana vañcaneneva saṅgahitaṃ.
关于砍断等——“砍断”指砍断手等肢体。“杀”指杀害。“缚”指用绳索等捆绑。“掠夺”有两种:雪中掠夺和丛林掠夺。在降雪的时候,借着雪隐蔽起来,抢劫走在路上的人,这叫雪中掠夺;借着丛林等隐蔽起来抢劫,这叫丛林掠夺。“抢劫”指对村庄、城镇等进行洗劫。“暴力行为”指凶暴的举动,也就是闯进别人家里,把刀抵在人胸口上,强行拿走想要的东西。这样,他就远离了砍断……乃至暴力行为。巴利
Chedanādīsu – chedananti hatthacchedanādi. Vadhoti māraṇaṃ. Bandhoti rajjubandhanādīhi bandhanaṃ. Viparāmosoti himaviparāmoso, gumbaviparāmosoti duvidho. Yañhi himapātasamaye himena paṭicchannā hutvā maggappaṭipannaṃ janaṃ musanti, ayaṃ himaviparāmoso. Yaṃ gumbādīhi paṭicchannā musanti, ayaṃ gumbaviparāmoso. Ālopo vuccati gāmanigamādīnaṃ vilopakaraṇaṃ. Sahasākāroti sāhasikakiriyā. Gehaṃ pavisitvā manussānaṃ ure satthaṃ ṭhapetvā icchitabhaṇḍaggahaṇaṃ. Evametasmā chedana…pe… sahasākārā paṭivirato hoti.
180 他是个知足的人,意思是:对于四种资具,他以十二种方式具备随所得而满足的知足。以随身所需为限,意思是只以维持身体所需为限。以随腹所需为限,意思是只以维持腹部所需为限。他拿了就走,意思是比丘把八种资具全部带上,系在身上就走。他不会想“这是我的精舍、这是我的住处范围、这是我的侍者”,因此没有执著,也没有系缚。就像箭离弦、象离群,他随自己所愿受用住处、林丛、树下、山林、石窟,独自站立,独自坐下,在一切威仪中都是独自一人,没有同伴。巴利
180.So santuṭṭho hotīti so catūsu paccayesu dvādasavidhena itarītarapaccayasantosena samannāgato hoti. Kāyaparihārikenāti kāyaṃ pariharaṇamattakena. Kucchiparihārikenāti kucchipariharaṇamattakena. Samādāyeva pakkamatīti aṭṭhavidhaṃ bhikkhu parikkhāramattakaṃ sabbaṃ gahetvāva kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ katvāva gacchati. ‘‘Mama vihāro pariveṇaṃ upaṭṭhāko’’ti saṅgo vā baddho vā na hoti. So jiyā muttasaro viya yūthā pakkanto, mattahatthī viya icchiticchitaṃ senāsanaṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ rukkhamūlaṃ vanapatthaṃ pabbhāraṃ paribhuñjanto ekova tiṭṭhati, ekova nisīdati. Sabbiriyāpathesu ekova adutiyo.
他向四方无碍,也无嗔恚,
无论得到什么,都能知足。
面对种种危难,他能安忍,毫不胆怯。
一个人应当像犀牛角那样独自而行。巴利
‘‘Cātuddiso appaṭigho ca hoti, Santussamāno itarītarena; Parissayānaṃ sahitā achambhī, Eko care khaggavisāṇakappo’’ti. (su. ni. 42);
他就达到了这样被称赞的犀牛角状态。巴利
Evaṃ vaṇṇitaṃ khaggavisāṇakappataṃ āpajjati.
现在用譬喻来说明这件事的意思,所以说了“譬如”等话。其中,“有翅膀的鸟”就是指长着翅膀的鸟。“飞”就是飞起来。这里简要的意思是:鸟知道“某个地方有棵树,果实熟了”,就从各个方向飞来,用爪、翅膀、嘴等刺穿、摇落那些果实来吃。它们不会想“这是今天吃的,那是明天吃的”。等果实吃完了,它们既不会给树设什么守护,也不会在那里留下羽毛、爪或嘴。然后它们对那棵树不再留恋,想往哪个方向飞就往哪个方向飞,各自带着翅膀飞起来就走了。同样,这位比丘无所执著、无所留恋地离去,因此说“只取所受持的而离去”。“以圣”即无过失。“内”即自己的自身。“无咎之乐”即无过失之乐。巴利
Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya sādhento, ‘‘seyyathāpī’’tiādimāha. Tattha pakkhī sakuṇoti pakkhayutto sakuṇo. Ḍetīti uppatati. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – sakuṇo nāma ‘‘asukasmiṃ padese rukkho paripakkaphalo’’ti ñatvā nānādisāhi āgantvā nakhapakkhatuṇḍādīhi tassa phalāni vijjhantā vidhunantā khādanti. ‘‘Idaṃ ajjatanāya, idaṃ svātanāya bhavissatī’’ti tesaṃ na hoti. Phale pana khīṇe neva rukkhassa ārakkhaṃ ṭhapenti, na tattha pattaṃ vā nakhaṃ vā tuṇḍaṃ vā ṭhapenti. Atha kho tasmiṃ rukkhe anapekkho hutvā yo yaṃ disābhāgaṃ icchati, so tena sapattabhārova uppatitvā gacchati. Evameva ayaṃ bhikkhu nissaṅgo nirapekkhoyeva pakkamati, tena vuttaṃ samādāyeva pakkamatīti. Ariyenāti niddosena. Ajjhattanti sake attabhāve. Anavajjasukhanti niddosasukhaṃ.
181 “他以眼见色后”:意思是说,这位具足了这圣戒蕴的比丘,以眼识看见色之后。其余语句中应当说明的内容,全都和前面所说的一样。“无染之乐”是指不被烦恼染污的乐,也叫做“无散乱之乐”。因为根律仪之乐是在所见等对象上,只以“所见”这样的程度生起运作,所以是无散乱的。巴利 注疏 1
181.So cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvāti so iminā ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato bhikkhu cakkhuviññāṇena rūpaṃ passitvāti attho. Sesapadesupi yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Abyāsekasukhanti kilesehi anavasittasukhaṃ. Avikiṇṇasukhantipi vuttaṃ. Indriyasaṃvarasukhañhi diṭṭhādīsu diṭṭhamattādivasena pavattatāya avikiṇṇaṃ hoti.
182 182. “他前进、返回时”:这位比丘具备以约束意根为首的六根的防护,在前进、返回等七种情形中,都以正念正知而行,是正知而行的人。这里应当说明的内容,在《禅那分别》中已经说过了。巴利
182.Soabhikkante paṭikkanteti so manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ saṃvarena samannāgato bhikkhu imesu abhikkantapaṭikkantādīsu sattasu ṭhānesu satisampajaññavasena sampajānakārī hoti. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ jhānavibhaṅge vuttameva.
他通过“以此……”等话要说明什么?是要说明林住的资具圆满。因为如果一个人不具备这四种资具,他的林住就成不了,就会落到跟畜生或林中野人说话的地步。住在林中的天神会发出恐怖的声音:“这样的恶比丘住在林里有什么用?”还会用手拍打头部,做出逃跑的样子。恶名也会传开:“某某比丘进了森林以后,做了这样那样的恶行。”但如果一个人具备这四种资具,他的林住就能成就。因为他省察自己的戒时,看不到任何黑点或斑点,就生起喜悦;再从头到尾观照它的坏灭和消散,就进入圣者的境地。住在林中的天神心生欢喜,称赞他的德行。这样一来,他的名声就像滴进水里的油滴一样扩散开来。“远离”等词的意思和前面说的一样。“他这样心得定……中略……了知随业而趣的众生”:在这个地方应该说的内容,全都如《清净道论》中所说。巴利
So iminā cātiādinā kiṃ dasseti? Araññavāsassa paccayasampattiṃ dasseti. Yassa hi ime cattāro paccayā natthi , tassa araññavāso na ijjhati, tiracchānagatehi vā vanacarakehi vā saddhiṃ vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Araññe adhivatthā devatā ‘‘kiṃ evarūpassa pāpabhikkhuno araññavāsenā’’ti bheravaṃ saddaṃ sāventi. Hatthehi sīsaṃ paharitvā palāyanākāraṃ karonti . ‘‘Asuko bhikkhu araññaṃ pavisitvā idañcidañca pāpakammaṃ akāsī’’ti ayaso pattharati. Yassa panete cattāro paccayā atthi, tassa araññavāso ijjhati. So hi attano sīlaṃ paccavekkhanto kiñci kāḷakaṃ vā tilakaṃ vā apassanto pītiṃ uppādetvā taṃ khayato vayato sammasanto ariyabhūmiṃ okkamati. Araññe adhivatthā devatā attamanā vaṇṇaṃ bhāsanti. Itissa udake pakkhittatelabindu viya yaso vitthāriko hoti. Vivittantiādīni heṭṭhā vuttatthāneva. So evaṃ samāhite citte…pe… yathākammūpage satte pajānātīti ettake ṭhāne yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge vuttameva.
185 185. 关于“以第三明,他如此心得定”这一句,应当理解为:作为观禅基础的第四禅心。“为了漏尽智”:就是为了阿罗汉道智。因为阿罗汉道能灭尽诸漏,所以称为漏尽。而这里的智属于那个道,因此这样说。“将心导向”:就是把观禅心导向。他在“此是苦”等句中,以亲证自相的方式如实了知、通达一切苦谛:“苦只有这么多,不会更多。”对于生起此苦的渴爱——“这是苦集”;这两者到达某个地方就灭尽,那个地方就是它们的不再生起、涅槃——“这是苦灭”;以及能到达那里的圣道——“这是通向苦灭的道路”——他以亲证自相的方式如实了知、通达。应当这样理解其含义。巴利
185. Tatiyavijjāya so evaṃ samāhite citteti vipassanāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ veditabbaṃ. Āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyāti arahattamaggañāṇatthāya. Arahattamaggo hi āsavānaṃ vināsanato āsavānaṃ khayoti vuccati. Tatra cetaṃ ñāṇaṃ tappariyāpannattāti. Cittaṃ abhininnāmetīti vipassanācittaṃ abhinīharati. So idaṃ dukkhanti evamādīsu – ‘‘ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti sabbampi dukkhasaccaṃ sarasalakkhaṇappaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti, paṭivijjhati. Tassa ca dukkhassa nibbattikaṃ taṇhaṃ – ayaṃ dukkhasamudayoti; tadubhayampi yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā nirujjhati, taṃ tesaṃ appavattiṃ nibbānaṃ – ayaṃ dukkhanirodhoti; tassa ca sampāpakaṃ ariyamaggaṃ – ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti, paṭivijjhatīti – evamattho veditabbo.
像这样从自性上把诸谛显示出来之后,现在要从烦恼的角度、以方便说法的形式来显示,于是说了“这些是漏”等话。对于这样知、这样见的人——也就是对于这样知、这样见的人——开示了与观智一起达到顶点的道。“欲漏”就是从欲漏的角度说。“解脱”显示的是道的刹那;“已解脱”显示的是果的刹那。因为在道的刹那心解脱,在果的刹那成为已解脱。“在已解脱中,有‘已解脱’的智”显示的是省察智。“生已尽”等显示的是他的阶位。他以那个智省察时,了知“生已尽”等。“已住”的意思是已出离、已遍住、已作、已行、已究竟。“梵行”指道梵行。因为凡夫善人和七有学一起,才称为住于梵行;漏已尽的人则是已出离而住。所以他省察自己的梵行住时,了知“梵行已住”。“应作已作”的意思是:对于四谛,通过四道,以遍知、断除、证悟、修习的方式,十六种应作之事都已究竟。因为凡夫善人等在做那件事,而漏已尽的人是应作已作者。所以他省察自己的应作之事时,了知“应作已作”。“不再有如此状态”的意思是:他了知“现在不再有为了如此状态、为了如此十六种事的状态、或者为了烦恼灭尽而修习道的必要了”。巴利
Evaṃ sarūpato saccāni dassetvā idāni kilesavasena pariyāyato dassento ime āsavātiādimāha. Tassa evaṃ jānato evaṃpassatoti tassa evaṃ jānantassa evaṃ passantassa saha vipassanāya koṭippattaṃ maggaṃ katheti. Kāmāsavāti kāmāsavato. Vimuccatīti iminā maggakkhaṇaṃ dasseti. Vimuttasminti iminā phalakkhaṇaṃ dasseti. Maggakkhaṇe hi cittaṃ vimuccati, phalakkhaṇe vimuttaṃ hoti. Vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇanti iminā paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ dasseti. Khīṇā jātītiādīhi tassa bhūmiṃ. Tena hi ñāṇena so paccavekkhanto ‘khīṇā jātī’tiādīni pajānāti. Vusitanti vuṭṭhaṃ parivuṭṭhaṃ kataṃ caritaṃ niṭṭhitanti attho. Brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Puthujjanakalyāṇakena hi saddhiṃ satta sekkhā brahmacariyavāsaṃ vasanti nāma. Khīṇāsavo vuṭṭhavāso. Tasmā so attano brahmacariyavāsaṃ paccavekkhanto vusitaṃ brahmacariyanti pajānāti. Kataṃ karaṇīyanti catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanāvasena soḷasavidhampi kiccaṃ niṭṭhāpitanti attho. Puthujjanakalyāṇakādayo hi taṃ kiccaṃ karonti; khīṇāsavo katakaraṇīyo. Tasmā so attano karaṇīyaṃ paccavekkhanto. ‘‘Kataṃ karaṇīya’’nti pajānāti. Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti ‘‘idāni puna etthabhāvāya evaṃ soḷasakiccabhāvāya kilesakkhayāya vā maggabhāvanākiccaṃ natthī’’ti pajānāti.
186 在“有贪”等项中,“未断”是指:还没有通过镇伏断、或者彼分断、或者正断而断除。巴利
186. Sarāgādīsu – appahīnoti vikkhambhanappahānena vā tadaṅgappahānena vā samucchedappahānena vā appahīno.
187 “得者”是指已经获得并安住在所得之中。“内心寂止”是指在自身内心、也就是称为“内自”的心中生起的寂止。“增上慧法观”是指在称为增上慧的诸蕴法上,以无常等行相持续运作的观。“与色俱行”是指以色相为所缘的色界等至。“与无色俱行”是指不以色相为所缘的无色等至。在这里应当知道:第一种是已得八等至的凡夫;第二种是干观圣弟子;第三种是已得八等至的圣弟子;第四种是世间一般人。巴利 注疏 1
187.Lābhī hotītiādīsu – lābhīti lābhavā paṭilabhitvā ṭhito. Ajjhattaṃ cetosamathassāti niyakajjhattasaṅkhāte attano citte uppannassa cetosamathassa. Adhipaññādhammavipassanāyāti adhipaññāsaṅkhātāya khandhadhammesu aniccādivasena pavattāya vipassanāya. Rūpasahagatānanti rūpanimittārammaṇānaṃ rūpāvacarasamāpattīnaṃ. Arūpasahagatānanti na rūpanimittārammaṇānaṃ arūpasamāpattīnaṃ. Ettha ca paṭhamo aṭṭhasamāpattilābhī puthujjano. Dutiyo sukkhavipassakaariyasāvako. Tatiyo aṭṭhasamāpattilābhī ariyasāvako. Catuttho lokiyamahājano veditabbo.
188 188. 在“顺流者”等说法中:“顺流者”指随顺轮回之流、沉没在轮回之流中的凡夫,应当这样理解。“逆流者”指逆流而行。这是对不顺着流走、反而逆流而行的人的称呼。“也不作恶业”指即使所制定的戒未被违犯,也不去做恶业。“即使与苦俱、与忧俱”指烦恼现起时,与生起的苦和忧一起。“圆满”指三学中任何一学都不缺。“清净”指没有杂染。“梵行”指最殊胜的修行。通过这一组,说的是入流者和一来者。那么,他们是哭着行梵行的吗?是的。他们以烦恼之哭而哭着行,这叫作行。具戒的凡夫比丘也包含在这里面。巴利
188. Anusotagāmīādīsu – anusotagāmīti vaṭṭasotaṃ anugato, vaṭṭasote nimuggo puthujjano veditabbo. Paṭisotagāmīti paṭisotagamano . Anusotaṃ agantvā paṭisotaṃ gacchantassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Pāpañca kammaṃ na karotīti paññattaṃ vītikkamanto na karoti. Sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassenāti kilesapariyuṭṭhāne sati uppannena dukkhadomanassena saddhimpi. Paripuṇṇanti tissannaṃ sikkhānaṃ ekāyapi anūnaṃ. Parisuddhanti nirupakkilesaṃ. Brahmacariyanti seṭṭhacariyaṃ. Iminā vārena sotāpannasakadāgāmino kathitā. Kiṃ pana te rudantā brahmacariyaṃ carantīti? Āma. Kilesarodanena rudantā caranti nāma. Sīlasampanno puthujjanabhikkhupi ettheva saṅgahito.
“已站稳”是指本性稳固。“不来者”是指因为对欲贪和嗔恚之心不可动摇,又因为不会再从那个世间返回,所以本性稳固。“已渡脱”是指已经渡过了渴爱之流。“已到彼岸”是指已经到达涅槃彼岸。“站在干地上”是指站在阿罗汉果的定境这个干地上。“心解脱”是指果定。“慧解脱”是指果智。“这被称为”是指这位漏已尽者被称为“已渡脱、已到彼岸、站在干地上的婆罗门”。因为他已经舍弃了恶行,所以被称为婆罗门。巴利
Ṭhitattoti ṭhitasabhāvo. Anāgāmīti kāmarāgabyāpādehi akampanīyacittatāya ca tamhā lokā anāvattidhammatāya ca ṭhitasabhāvo nāma. Tiṇṇoti taṇhāsotaṃ uttiṇṇo. Pāraṅgatoti nibbānapāraṃ gato. Thale tiṭṭhatīti arahattaphalasamāpattithale tiṭṭhati. Cetovimuttinti phalasamādhiṃ. Paññāvimuttinti phalañāṇaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ khīṇāsavo ‘‘tiṇṇo pāraṅgato thale tiṭṭhati brāhmaṇo’’ti vuccati. Bāhitapāpatāya hi esa brāhmaṇo nāma.
189 在“少闻”等条目中:“少闻”是指,在世尊的九分教法里只听过很少一点。所谓“未解义、未解法而法随法行”,是指虽然了解义注和巴利圣典,却没有实践与出世间法相应的前行之道。按照这一方式,应当理解一切处的含义。巴利 注疏 1
189. Appassutādīsu – appakaṃ sutaṃ hotīti navaṅge satthusāsane kiñcideva thokaṃ sutaṃ hoti. Na atthamaññāya, na dhammamaññāya dhammānudhammapaṭipanno hotīti aṭṭhakathañca pāḷiñca jānitvā lokuttaradhammassa anurūpadhammaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno na hoti. Iminā nayena sabbattha attho veditabbo.
190 在“不动沙门”等说法中——“不动沙门”就是“沙门不动”,“摩”字只是连音时补上的音节,意思是:不动摇的沙门、坚定的沙门。“这被称为”是说:这位入流者因为以生起于教法中的信而站稳,所以被称为“不动沙门”。而一来者因为还有染着烦恼,所以被称为“沙门红莲”;这里说的“红”义,就是“红莲”义。不来者因为没有名为欲贪的染着烦恼,所以被称为“沙门白莲”;这里说的“白”义,就是“白莲”义。漏已尽者则因为没有那些使心僵硬的烦恼,所以在诸沙门中被称为“沙门柔软者”;而且从少苦这一点来说,他也是“沙门柔软者”。巴利
190. Samaṇamacalādīsu – samaṇamacaloti samaṇaacalo, makāro padasandhikaro. Niccalasamaṇo, thirasamaṇoti attho . Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ sotāpanno sāsane mūlajātāya saddhāya patiṭṭhitattā ‘samaṇamacalo’ti vuccati. Sakadāgāmī pana rajjanakilesassa atthitāya samaṇapadumoti vutto. Rattaṭṭho hi idha padumaṭṭho nāmāti vuttaṃ. Anāgāmī kāmarāgasaṅkhātassa rajjanakilesassa natthitāya samaṇapuṇḍarīkoti vutto. Paṇḍaraṭṭho hi idha puṇḍarīkaṭṭho nāmāti vuttaṃ . Khīṇāsavo ca thaddhabhāvakarānaṃ kilesānaṃ abhāvena samaṇesu samaṇasukhumālo nāmāti vutto. Appadukkhaṭṭhenapi cesa samaṇasukhumāloyevāti.
五法解说的注释巴利
5. Pañcakaniddesavaṇṇanā
191 191. 在五法解说中,这里说的“在此处”,是指在前面以“他造作,又追悔”等方式列举的那些人。“那即是”指的是这个人。“造作”这个词,在这里适用于业、行为、伤害、精进、破坏、犯戒等意思。比如,它在“凡有任何苦生起,一切都以造作为缘”(《经集》748)中指的是业;在“大祭祀、大造作,那些没有大果报”(《增支部》4.39)中指的是行为;在“为了乔达摩沙门而杀害生命”(《中部》2.51-52)中指的是伤害;在“应造作、应出离、应致力于佛陀的教法”(《相应部》1.185)中指的是精进;在“他远离伤害种子类和植物类”(《长部》1.10, 194;《中部》1.293)中指的是破坏。但在“他造作,又追悔”(《增支部》5.142)这一句中,这个词是用来指犯戒。所以,这里的意思是:他因犯戒而造作,又因此而生起追悔。巴利 注疏 1
191. Pañcake – tatrāti tesu ‘‘ārabhati ca vippaṭisārī ca hotī’’tiādinā nayena heṭṭhā uddiṭṭhapuggalesu. Yvāyanti yo ayaṃ. Ārabhatīti ettha ārambhasaddo kammakiriyāhiṃsanavīriyavikopanāpattivītikkamesu vattati. Tathā hesa ‘‘yaṃkiñci dukkhaṃ sambhoti, sabbaṃ ārambhapaccayā’’ti (su. ni. 748) kamme āgato. ‘‘Mahāyaññā mahārambhā, na te honti mahapphalā’’ti (a. ni. 4.39) kiriyāyaṃ. ‘‘Samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ uddissa pāṇaṃ ārabhantī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.51-52) hiṃsane. ‘‘Ārabhatha, nikkhamatha, yuñjatha buddhasāsane’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.185) vīriye. ‘‘Bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.10, 194; ma. ni. 1.293) vikopane. ‘‘Ārabhati ca vippaṭisārī ca hotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.142) ayaṃ pana āpattivītikkame āgato. Tasmā āpattivītikkamavasena ārabhati ceva tappaccayā vippaṭisārī ca hotīti ayamettha attho.
不能如实了知:因为还没有证得,所以不能按照事物的真实样子了知。于其处:意思是说,在某人达到那个阶段时,这个人已经生起的种种恶劣不善法就会彻底灭尽,毫无剩余。那么,是达到了什么阶段,那些法才灭尽呢?是阿拉汉道。不过,对于已经证得果位的人来说,那些法才叫作已灭尽。即便如此,这里应当理解为:是依据道的作用而说为果。由造作而生:指由犯戒而生起。由追悔而生:指从追悔而生起。增长:指通过一再地生起而增长。善哉:是恳请时的善语。这里说的是:即使尊者至今仍有违犯,尽管如此,我们仍然恳请尊者:应当发露的就发露,应当出罪的就出罪,应当公开的就公开;舍弃由造作而生的诸漏;以观察安住于清净之处,去除并驱除由追悔而生的诸漏后,应当修习观的心与观的慧。以此第五种人:就是以此第五种漏尽者。将成为同等:指以出世间功德而成为同等。这就是说,应当以这漏尽者来这样教诫。巴利
Yathābhūtaṃ nappajānātīti anadhigatattā yathāsabhāvato na jānāti. Yatthassāti yasmiṃ assa, yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā etassa puggalassa uppannā pāpakā akusalā dhammā aparisesā nirujjhantīti attho. Kiṃ pana patvā te nirujjhantīti? Arahattamaggaṃ. Phalappattassa pana niruddhā nāma honti. Evaṃ santepi idha maggakiccavasena phalameva vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ārambhajāti āpattivītikkamasambhavā. Vippaṭisārajāti vippaṭisārato jātā. Pavaḍḍhantīti punappunaṃ uppajjanena vaḍḍhanti. Sādhūti āyācanasādhu. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yāva aparaddhañca vata āyasmatā, evaṃ santepi mayaṃ āyasmantaṃ yācāma – ‘‘desetabbayuttakassa desanāya, vuṭṭhātabbayuttakassa vuṭṭhānena, āvikātabbayuttakassa āvikiriyāya, ārambhaje āsave pahāya, suddhante ṭhitabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena vippaṭisāraje āsave paṭivinodetvā nīharitvā vipassanācittañceva vipassanāpaññañca bhāvetū’’ti. Amunā pañcamena puggalenāti etena pañcamena khīṇāsavapuggalena. Samasamo bhavissatīti lokuttaraguṇehi samabhāveneva samo bhavissatīti evaṃ khīṇāsavena ovaditabboti attho.
造作而不追悔:犯了戒,为了出罪而去找同分的比丘,因此不追悔。《增支部义注》里则说:“因为已经出罪,所以不追悔。”不造作而追悔:不犯戒,但因为不精通律制,在无犯之处生起犯想,于是追悔。《增支部义注》里则说:“曾经犯过一次戒,从那里出罪之后,虽然以后不再犯,却无法消除悔恨。”不造作也不追悔:既不犯戒,也不追悔。那么这是什么样的人呢?是舍弃精进的人。他确实这样想:“我何必在这佛陀在世的时候入般涅槃?我要在未来弥勒正自觉者出世的时候入般涅槃。”他即使戒行清净,也不修习行道。对这样的人,应当这样教诫:“具寿为什么放逸而住?凡夫的趣是不定的。具寿即使能遇到弥勒正自觉者,也可能遇不到。所以,为了证得阿拉汉果,请修习观。”其余各处,应依照已说的方法了知。巴利
Ārabhati na vippaṭisārī hotīti āpattiṃ āpajjati. Taṃ pana desetuṃ sabhāgapuggalaṃ pariyesati. Tasmā na vippaṭisārī hoti. Aṅguttaraṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘vuṭṭhitattā na vippaṭisārī hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Na ārabhati vippaṭisārī hotīti āpattiṃ nāpajjati, vinayapaññattiyaṃ pana akovidattā anāpattiyaṃ āpattisaññī hutvā vippaṭisārī hoti. Aṅguttaraṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘sakiṃ āpattiṃ āpajjitvā tato vuṭṭhāya pacchā kiñcāpi nāpajjati, vippaṭisāraṃ pana vinodetuṃ na sakkotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Na ārabhati na vippaṭisārī hotīti neva āpattiṃ āpajjati, na vippaṭisārī hoti. Katamo panesa puggaloti? Ossaṭṭhavīriyapuggalo. So hi ‘‘kiṃ me imasmiṃ buddhakāle parinibbānena, anāgate metteyyasammāsambuddhakāle parinibbāyissāmī’’ti visuddhasīlopi paṭipattiṃ na pūreti. Sopi ‘‘kimatthaṃ āyasmā pamatto viharati puthujjanassa nāma gati anibaddhā. Āyasmā hi metteyyasammāsambuddhassa sammukhabhāvaṃ labheyyapi na labheyyāpīti arahattatthāya vipassanaṃ bhāvehī’’ti ovaditabbova. Sesaṃ sabbattha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
192 192. 在“给了之后又轻视”等情形中:有一位比丘福德广大,常常得到四种生活所需。他拿到衣服等物品后,就问另一位福德少的比丘要不要。那位比丘虽然被一再询问,还是照样接受。于是这位比丘有点生气,想让他感到羞愧,就说:“这个人靠自己的福报是得不到衣服等物品的,他是靠了我们才得到的。”这样的人,就叫“给了之后又轻视”。
另有一种情况:一个人和另一个人一起住了两三年,起初把那个人当作长辈一样恭敬,后来时间久了,就不再重视他,连他来了也不起身,也不去侍候他。这样的人,就叫“因共住而轻视”。巴利 注疏 1
192. Datvā avajānātītiādīsu – eko bhikkhu mahāpuñño catupaccayalābhī hoti. So cīvarādīni labhitvā aññaṃ appapuññaṃ āpucchati. Sopi tasmiṃ punappunaṃ āpucchantepi gaṇhātiyeva. Athassa itaro thokaṃ kupito hutvā maṅkubhāvaṃ uppādetukāmo vadati – ‘‘ayaṃ attano dhammatāya cīvarādīni na labhati, amhe nissāya labhatī’’ti. Evaṃ puggalo datvā avajānāti nāma. Eko pana ekena saddhiṃ dve tīṇi vassāni vasanto pubbe taṃ puggalaṃ garuṃ katvā pacchā gacchante gacchante kāle cittīkāraṃ na karoti, āsanāpi na vuṭṭhāti, upaṭṭhānampi na gacchati. Evaṃ puggalo saṃvāsena avajānāti nāma.
“一开始就信受的口”:意思是,不论听到什么,就在那上面定论其口,也就是在对方刚说的第一句话上就认定不移。“心已倾向”:就是有信仰。
这里的道理是这样:某个人只对一位看起来如法的比丘说“这个人不如法”,听了这话以后,他就拿这个当定论。后来另一位同类的比丘说“这个人是如法的”,他也不接受那人的话,只抓住前一位比丘的话,说:“某某人对我们说过‘这个人不如法’。”又有一个人,对一位破戒者说“这个人持戒”,他相信那人的话以后,即使另一位比丘又说“这个比丘不如法,他不适合到你跟前去”,他也不接受那人的话,只抓住前一位比丘的话。又有一个人,听到称赞也接受,听到毁谤也照样接受。这也是名为“一开始就信受的口”。“应信受的口”,意思是无论听到什么,就在那上面定论其口。巴利
Ādheyyamukhoti ādito dheyyamukho. Paṭhamavacanasmiṃyeva ṭhapitamukhoti attho. Adhimuccitā hotīti saddhātā hoti. Tatrāyaṃ nayo – eko puggalo sāruppaṃyeva bhikkhuṃ ‘asāruppo eso’ti katheti, taṃ sutvā esa niṭṭhaṃ gacchati. Puna aññena sabhāgena bhikkhunā ‘sāruppo aya’nti vuttepi tassa vacanaṃ na gaṇhāti ‘‘asukena nāma ‘asāruppo aya’nti amhākaṃ kathita’’nti purimabhikkhunova kathaṃ gaṇhāti. Aparopissa dussīlaṃ ‘sīlavā’ti katheti. Tassa vacanaṃ saddahitvā puna aññena ‘‘asāruppo esa bhikkhu, nāyaṃ tumhākaṃ santikaṃ upasaṅkamituṃ yutto’’ti vuttopi tassa vacanaṃ aggahetvā purimasseva kathaṃ gaṇhāti. Aparo vaṇṇampi kathitaṃ gaṇhāti, avaṇṇampi kathitaṃ gaṇhātiyeva. Ayampi ādheyyamukhoyeva nāma. Ādhātabbamukho yaṃ yaṃ suṇāti, tattha tattha ṭhapitamukhoti attho.
动摇:因为信等状态只能短暂维持,又被不信等动摇,所以叫动摇。少信:就是信很少、信不圆满。其余几个词也是同样的道理。不过在这里,因为反复亲近的缘故,信本身就是虔敬。爱也可以说是信爱,说成执著于世俗的爱也行。净信就是信的清净。像这样,一个人是动摇的,也就是说,因为他的信很少等等,所以这个人就叫作动摇的人。就像姜黄染料,像糠堆里被敲过的木桩,像放在马背上的葫芦,没有固定的落脚处,一瞬间生起净信,一瞬间又发怒。巴利
Loloti saddhādīnaṃ ittarakālaṭṭhitikattā assaddhiyādīhi lulitabhāvena lolo. Ittarasaddhoti parittasaddho, aparipuṇṇasaddho. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ettha pana punappunaṃ bhajanavasena saddhāva bhatti. Pemaṃ saddhāpemaṃ gehasitapemampi vaṭṭati. Pasādo saddhāpasādova. Evaṃ puggalo lolo hotīti evaṃ ittarasaddhāditāya puggalo lolo nāma hoti. Haliddirāgo viya , thusarāsimhi koṭṭitakhāṇuko viya, assapiṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhapitakumbhaṇḍaṃ viya ca anibaddhaṭṭhāno muhuttena pasīdati, muhuttena kuppati.
愚钝,就是由于没有智慧而愚钝;昏昧,就是由于不清明而昏昧。意思是极度愚痴的人。巴利
Mando momūhoti aññāṇabhāvena mando avisadatāya momūho. Mahāmūḷhoti attho.
193 193. 在“以战士为比喻”这一段中:“战士”,就是靠打仗谋生的人。“尘团”,是指大象、马等用脚踩破地面后扬起来的尘土堆。“不能站稳”,是说没办法稳住身体站在那里。“能忍受尘团”,是说即使看见那团尘土也还是忍得住。“旗顶”,是指插在大象、马等背上或车上的旗帜最高处。“喧嚷”,是指大象、马、车等以及军队发出的高声大喊。“在交战中”,是指双方碰上时哪怕只是很小的打击。“被杀伤”,是指受到折磨、陷入伤害。“被击垮”,是指遭遇失败、失去正常状态。“能忍受交战”,是指即使挨了两三下打击也还能扛住、忍得住。“就在那战场的最前线”,就是指那个取胜的营地所在之处。“住下来”,是指征服之后大约住上七天。为什么要这样?为了照料受伤者的伤口,也为了了解已经出过力的人有什么突出表现而给他们安排相应的职位,还为了享受统治的快乐。巴利
193. Yodhājīvūpamesu – yodhājīvāti yuddhūpajīvino. Rajagganti hatthiassādīnaṃ pādappahārabhinnāya bhūmiyā uggataṃ rajakkhandhaṃ. Na santhambhatīti santhambhitvā ṭhātuṃ na sakkoti. Sahati rajagganti rajakkhandhaṃ disvāpi adhivāseti. Dhajagganti hatthiassādipiṭṭhesu vā rathesu vā ussāpitānaṃ dhajānaṃ aggaṃ. Ussāraṇanti hatthiassarathādīnañceva balakāyassa ca uccāsaddamahāsaddaṃ. Sampahāreti samāgate appamattakepi pahāre. Haññatīti vihaññati, vighātaṃ āpajjati. Byāpajjatīti vipattiṃ āpajjati, pakatibhāvaṃ jahati. Sahati sampahāranti dve tayo pahāre patvāpi sahati, adhivāseti . Tameva saṅgāmasīsanti tameva jayakhandhāvāraṭṭhānaṃ. Ajjhāvasatīti sattāhamattaṃ abhibhavitvā āvasati. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Laddhappahārānaṃ pahārajagganatthañceva katakammānaṃ visesaṃ ñatvā ṭhānantaradānatthañca issariyasukhānubhavanatthañca.
194 现在,因为导师和那些以战斗为生的人之间已经没有什么关系了,但为了在这个教法中指出那五种人,才引用了这个比喻。所以,为了指出那五种人,才说了“正是如此”等话。巴利 注疏 1
194. Idāni yasmā satthu yodhājīvehi kiccaṃ natthi, imasmiṃ pana sāsane tathārūpe pañca puggale dassetuṃ idaṃ opammaṃ ābhataṃ, tasmā te puggale dassento evamevantiādimāha.
在这里,“沉没”是指在邪思惟中陷落、没入其中。“不能守护梵行”是说无法让梵行的修持不间断地维持、保护下去。“显露学处的羸弱”,就是把在学处上软弱无力的状态表明出来。“他的王舍城是什么?”这是在问:那个人的所谓王舍城,到底指什么?“美丽”,就是容貌端正。“好看”,就是值得一看。“可爱”,就是只凭看见就能让人心生清净信心。“以最上”,就是以最殊胜的。“以色身殊妙与肢体匀称”,就是指身体肤色和四肢形态两方面。巴利
Tattha saṃsīdatīti micchāvitakkasmiṃ visīdati, anupavisati. Na sakkoti brahmacariyaṃ sandhāretunti brahmacariyavāsaṃ anupacchijjamānaṃ gopetuṃ na sakkoti. Sikkhādubbalyaṃ āvikatvāti sikkhāya dubbalabhāvaṃ pakāsetvā. Kimassa rajaggasminti kiṃ tassa puggalassa rajaggaṃ nāmāti vadati. Abhirūpāti abhirūpavatī. Dassanīyāti dassanayoggā. Pāsādikāti dassaneneva cittappasādāvahā. Paramāyāti uttamāya. Vaṇṇapokkharatāyāti sarīravaṇṇena ceva aṅgasaṇṭhānena ca.
196 196. “嘲笑”就是讥笑。“大声说”就是讲话。“大笑”就是拍手放声狂笑。“讥讽”就是讲讥讽的话。巴利
196.Ūhasatīti avahasati. Ullapatīti katheti. Ujjagghatīti pāṇiṃ paharitvā mahāhasitaṃ hasati. Uppaṇḍetīti uppaṇḍanakathaṃ katheti.
197 197.“强行靠近坐下”:就是制伏对方后,在他身边或者同一个座位上坐下来。第二个词也是同样的道理。“压倒”:就是覆盖上去。巴利
197.Abhinisīdatīti abhibhavitvā santike vā ekāsane vā nisīdati. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Ajjhottharatīti avattharati.
198 把他的手从被抓的地方解开,并让它松脱出来。这里剩下的内容一看就懂。巴利
198.Viniveṭhetvā vinimocetvāti gahitaṭṭhānato tassa hatthaṃ viniveṭhetvā ceva, mocetvā ca. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
199 关于常乞食者:
因为愚钝、因为糊涂,他既不懂什么是受持,也不懂有什么功德,只是由于自己愚钝糊涂、出于无知,就成了常乞食者。
出于恶欲、被欲望驱使的人则想:“我既然是常乞食者,人们就会用四种资具来供养我,还会因为我有惭耻心、少欲等功德而敬重我。”他就这样安住在恶劣的欲望上,被这种恶欲所压倒,而成为常乞食者。
因为精神失常而到处乞食的人,是由于疯狂、心智散乱,才被称为常乞食者。
因为受到称赞——他想:“这种常乞食的头陀支,是诸佛和佛弟子所称赞、所赞叹的。”因此成为常乞食者。
依止少欲等——他想:“这样我就会少欲,这个常乞食支会帮助我达到少欲;这样我就会知足,这个常乞食支会帮助我达到知足;这样我就能磨掉烦恼,这个常乞食支会帮助我磨掉烦恼。”因此成为常乞食者。
以此为需要——意思是,他以这种善的行为实践为需要,或者仅仅以乞食本身为需要,也就是依靠随所得而维持生活。
最上——指最殊胜。其余的是它的同义词。巴利 注疏 1
199. Piṇḍapātikesu – mandattā momūhattāti neva samādānaṃ jānāti, na ānisaṃsaṃ; attano pana mandattā momūhattā aññāṇeneva piṇḍapātiko hoti. Pāpiccho icchāpakatoti piṇḍapātikassa me sato ‘‘ayaṃ piṇḍapātiko’’ti catupaccayasakkāraṃ karissanti. Lajjī, appicchotiādīhi ca guṇehi sambhāvessantīti. Evaṃ pāpikāya icchāya ṭhatvā tāya pāpicchāya abhibhūto hutvā piṇḍapātiko hoti. Ummādavasena piṇḍāya caranto pana ummādā cittavikkhepā piṇḍapātiko nāma hoti. Vaṇṇitanti idaṃ piṇḍapātikaṅgaṃ nāma buddhehi ca buddhasāvakehi ca vaṇṇitaṃ pasatthanti piṇḍapātiko hoti. Appicchataṃyeva nissāyātiādīsu – ‘‘iti appiccho bhavissāmi, idaṃ me piṇḍapātikaṅgaṃ appicchatāya saṃvattissati; ‘iti santuṭṭho bhavissāmi idaṃ me piṇḍapātikaṅgaṃ santuṭṭhiyā saṃvattissati’; ‘iti kilese saṃlikhissāmi’, idaṃ me piṇḍapātikaṅgaṃ kilesasallekhanatthāya saṃvattissatī’’ti piṇḍapātiko hoti. Idamatthitanti imāya kalyāṇāya paṭipattiyā atthikabhāvaṃ, iminā vā piṇḍapātamattena atthikabhāvaṃ. Yaṃ yaṃ laddhaṃ tena teneva yāpanabhāvaṃ nissāyāti attho. Aggoti jeṭṭhako. Sesāni tasseva vevacanāni.
就像“从牛得到牛乳”,是说牛乳是因为有母牛才存在,没有母牛就没有牛乳。“从牛乳得到酪”等等,也是同样的道理。同样地,正如在五种牛产品中醍醐最为上等,在这五种乞食者中,那位依止少欲等功德而成为乞食者的人,也是最高、最胜、最首要、最上等、最殊胜的。不过,在这五种乞食者中,只有两种人是真正的乞食者,另外三种不是乞食者,只是名义上被称为乞食者而已。对于食后不食者等,也是同样的道理。巴利
Gavā khīranti gāvito khīraṃ nāma hoti, na vinā gāviyā. Khīramhā dadhītiādīsupi eseva nayo. Evamevanti yathā etesu pañcasu gorasesu sappimaṇḍo aggo; evamevaṃ imesu pañcasu piṇḍapātikesu yvāyaṃ appicchatādīni nissāya piṇḍapātiko hoti. Ayaṃ aggo ca seṭṭho ca pāmokkho ca uttamo ca pavaro ca. Imesu pana pañcasu piṇḍapātikesu dveva janā piṇḍapātikā , tayo na piṇḍapātikā. Nāmamattena pana piṇḍapātikāti veditabbā. Khalupacchābhattikādīsupi eseva nayoti.
(六)六法解说注释巴利
6. Chakkaniddesavaṇṇanā
202 在六法当中,“其中”指的是这六种人。“正自觉者应当以此来看待”,意思是:应当通过那无师、自己生起的一切知智,把这个人看作是一切知佛。巴利 注疏 1
202. Chakke – tatrāti tesu chasu puggalesu. Sammāsambuddho tena daṭṭhabboti so puggalo tena anācariyakena attanā uppāditena sabbaññutaññāṇena sabbaññubuddho daṭṭhabbo.
在“独觉者以此”等句里,这个人就是以独觉智而成为独觉者。以声闻波罗蜜智来说,那些人就是舍利弗和目犍连。以灭尽苦来说,那些人就是其余的阿罗汉。以不再回到这个状态来说,那个人就是不还者。以还会回到这个状态来说,那些人应被看作入流者和一来者。巴利
Paccekasambuddho tenātiādīsupi tena paccekasambodhiñāṇena so puggalo paccekasambuddho. Tena sāvakapāramīñāṇena te puggalā sāriputtamoggallānā. Tena dukkhassa antakaraṇena te puggalā avasesā arahanto. Tena itthattaṃ anāgamanena so puggalo anāgāmī. Tena itthattaṃ āgamanena te puggalā sotāpannasakadāgāmino daṭṭhabbāti.
七法解说的注释巴利
7. Sattakaniddesavaṇṇanā
203 203. 在七法(的解说)中:“一次沉没”就是沉没一次。“以一向黑暗的”是指以纯粹黑暗的、被称为无有说、无因说、无作说的决定邪见之法。“如此之人”是说,由于这个原因,这个人一次沉没,就那样一直沉没着。因为据说对这个人来说,从再有中浮出是不可能的。就像末伽梨瞿舍梨等人一样,他们只是下方地狱之火的食料。巴利 注疏 1
203. Sattake – sakiṃ nimuggoti ekavāraṃ nimuggo. Ekantakāḷakehīti ekanteneva kāḷakehi natthikavādaahetukavādaakiriyavādasaṅkhātehi niyatamicchādiṭṭhidhammehi. Evaṃ puggaloti iminā kāraṇena puggalo ekavāraṃ nimuggo tathā nimuggova hoti. Etassa hi puna bhavato vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthīti vadanti. Makkhaligosālādayo viya heṭṭhā narakaggīnaṃyeva āhāro hoti.
“善哉,于诸善法有信”——对善法有信心,这叫做“善哉之见”,于是他浮起来。他就凭这么一点善法,便算是浮起来了。“善哉,有惭”等句,道理也一样。“只会退失”——就像在经行处泼了水一样,只会一味地退失下去。“如此之人”,就是这样一个“善哉,有信”的人。依靠这些信等善法,他浮起一次,却因为退失这些善法,又沉了下去,就像提婆达多等人一样。提婆达多虽然修成了八种禅定和五种神通,但后来因为对诸佛生起敌意,退失了那些功德,造下出佛身血和破僧的恶业,身坏命终之后,在第二个心刹那便投生到地狱。拘迦利因为诽谤两位上首弟子,投生到了红莲地狱。巴利
Sāhu saddhā kusalesu dhammesūti kusaladhammesu saddhā nāma sādhuladdhikāti ummujjati. So tāvatakeneva kusalena ummujjati nāma. Sādhu hirītiādīsupi eseva nayo. Hāyatiyevāti caṅkavāre āsittaudakaṃ viya ekantena parihāyateva. Evaṃ puggaloti evaṃ sāhu saddhāti. Imesaṃ saddhādīnaṃ vasena ekavāraṃ ummujjitvā tesaṃ parihāniyā puna nimujjatiyeva, devadattādayo viya. Devadatto hi aṭṭha samāpattiyo, pañca ca abhiññāyo nibbattetvāpi puna buddhānaṃ paṭikaṇṭakatāya tehi guṇehi parihīno ruhiruppādakammaṃ saṅghabhedakammañca katvā kāyassa bhedā dutiyacittavārena niraye nibbatti. Kokāliko dve aggasāvake upavaditvā padumaniraye nibbatto.
既不退失也不增长:意思是,在能力不足的时候不退失,在能力充足的时候也不增长。这两种情况,无论对在家众还是出家众,都应该说明。有些人身为在家众,在能力不足时,会固定安排半月食、筹食或雨安居食;后来即使能力充足了,他也仍然只维持半月食等原来的分量。出家众也一样,最初在能力不足时,受持诵经或头陀支;后来即使因为智慧、力和精进具足而能力充足了,他也不再进一步多做。这样的人,就是依靠这些信等善法,从沉没中浮出来之后,名为“住立者”。巴利
Neva hāyati no vaḍḍhatīti appahonakakālepi na hāyati, pahonakakālepi na vaḍḍhati. Ubhayampi panetaṃ agārikenapi anagārikenapi dīpetabbaṃ. Ekacco hi agāriko appahonakakāle pakkhikabhattaṃ vā salākabhattaṃ vā vassāvāsikaṃ vā upanibandhāpeti. So pacchā pahonakakālepi pakkhikabhattādimattameva pavatteti. Anagārikopi ādimhi appahonakakāle uddesaṃ vā dhutaṅgaṃ vā gaṇhāti, medhābalavīriyasampattiyā pahonakakālepi tato uttariṃ na karoti. Evaṃ puggaloti evaṃ imāya saddhādīnaṃ ṭhitiyā puggalo ummujjitvā ṭhito nāma hoti.
从水里浮上来后,他观察、眺望,这就是说,入流的人从沉没中起身之后,看着该走的道路和该去的方向。巴利
Ummujjitvā vipassati viloketīti sotāpanno puggalo uṭṭhahitvā gamanamaggaṃ gantabbaṃ disaṃ vā āloketi nāma.
浮起之后向前游,说的是斯陀含人;因为烦恼已经变得微薄,他从水中起身,朝着该去的方向前进,这就叫作向前游。巴利
Ummujjitvāpataratīti sakadāgāmipuggalo kilesatanutāya uṭṭhahitvā gantabbadisābhimukho patarati nāma.
“到达立足处”是指阿那含这一种人,起身、观察、展开、行进之后,在某个地方名为达到了立足处,就停在那里,不再回来。巴利
Patigādhappatto hotīti anāgāmipuggalo uṭṭhāya viloketvā pataritvā gantvā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne patiṭṭhāpatto nāma hoti, tiṭṭhati, na punāgacchati.
渡过了一切烦恼洪流,到达彼岸,站在涅槃的陆地上,这才叫作“已渡脱、至彼岸、立于陆地”。而这七种人,是用水的比喻来说明的。巴利
Tiṇṇo pāraṅgato thale tiṭṭhatīti sabbakilesoghaṃ taritvā paratīraṃ gantvā nibbānathale ṭhito nāma hoti. Ime pana satta puggalā udakopamena dīpitā.
据说有七位徒步商人,在长途跋涉途中遇到一条满水的河。他们当中,第一个人是个怕水的,刚一下水,就在入水的地方沉了下去,再也浮不上来,就在水里成了鱼和乌龟的食物。第二个人在入水的地方沉下去,浮上来一次,又沉了下去,再也浮不上来,也在水里成了鱼和乌龟的食物。第三个人沉下去后又浮了上来。他停在河中间,既回不到这边岸,也到不了那边岸。第四个人浮上来站住后,朝上岸的渡口望去。第五个人望见下水的渡口,就向前游去。第六个人渡过河到了对岸,站在齐腰深的水里。第七个人到了对岸后,用香粉等沐浴,穿上上等的衣服,涂上芳香的油膏,佩戴青莲花等饰物,用种种装饰打扮好,进入大城,登上殊胜的楼阁,享用最好的饮食。巴利
Satta kira jaṅghavāṇijā addhānamaggapaṭipannā antarāmagge ekaṃ puṇṇanadiṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Tesu paṭhamaṃ otiṇṇo udakabhīruko puriso otiṇṇaṭṭhāneyeva nimujjitvā puna uṭṭhātuṃ nāsakkhi, antoyeva macchakacchapabhakkho jāto. Dutiyo otiṇṇaṭṭhāne nimujjitvā sakiṃ uṭṭhahitvā puna nimuggo uṭṭhātuṃ nāsakkhi, antoyeva macchakacchapabhakkho jāto. Tatiyo nimujjitvā uṭṭhahi. So majjhe nadiyā ṭhatvā neva orato āgantuṃ, na parato gantuṃ asakkhi . Catuttho uṭṭhāya ṭhito uttaraṇatitthaṃ olokesi. Pañcamo otaraṇatitthaṃ oloketvā patari. Chaṭṭho taritvā pārimatīraṃ gantvā kaṭippamāṇe udake ṭhito. Sattamo pārimatīraṃ gantvā gandhacuṇṇādīhi nhātvā varavatthāni nivāsetvā surabhivilepanaṃ vilimpitvā nīluppalādīni piḷandhitvā nānālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍito mahānagaraṃ pavisitvā pāsādavaramāruyha uttamabhojanaṃ bhuñji.
在这里,那七位徒步商人比喻这七种人。河流比喻轮回。第一位怕水的人,刚一下水就沉下去,比喻邪见者沉没在轮回里。沉下去又浮上来、接着又沉下去的人,比喻只因为信心等善法刚刚生起而暂时浮出,后来又因为退失而沉没的人。停在河中间的人,比喻因为信心等善法得以安住的人。望着对岸渡口的人,比喻正在观察应走的道路和方向的入流者。向前游过去的人,比喻因为烦恼淡薄而向前推进的一来者。渡过河后站在齐腰深水里的人,比喻因为不退转之法而安住的不来者。沐浴之后登上对岸、站在陆地上的人,比喻已经超越四种瀑流、安立在涅槃之地的漏尽婆罗门。应当知道,站在陆地上的人进入大城,登上殊胜的楼阁,享用最上等的饮食,比喻漏尽者以涅槃为所缘,进入果定而度过时光。至于双分解脱等,前面已经说明了。巴利
Tattha satta jaṅghavāṇijā viya ime satta puggalā. Nadī viya vaṭṭaṃ. Paṭhamassa udakabhīrukassa purisassa otiṇṇaṭṭhāneyeva nimujjanaṃ viya micchādiṭṭhikassa vaṭṭe nimujjanaṃ. Ummujjitvā nimuggapuriso viya saddhādīnaṃ uppattimattakena ummujjitvā tesaṃ parihāniyā nimuggapuggalo. Majjhe nadiyā ṭhito viya saddhādīnaṃ ṭhitiyā ṭhitapuggalo. Uttaraṇatitthaṃ olokento viya gantabbamaggaṃ gantabbadisaṃ vā olokento sotāpanno. Pataritapuriso viya kilesatanutāya pataranto sakadāgāmī. Taritvā kaṭimatte udake ṭhitapuriso viya anāvattitadhammatāya ṭhito anāgāmī. Nhatvā pārimatīraṃ uttaritvā thale ṭhitapuriso viya cattāro oghe atikkamitvā nibbānathale ṭhito khīṇāsavabrāhmaṇo. Thale ṭhitapurisassa nagaraṃ pavisitvā pāsādavaraṃ āruyha uttamabhojanabhuñjanaṃ viya khīṇāsavassa nibbānārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā vītināmanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ubhatobhāgavimuttādayo heṭṭhā pakāsitāyevāti.
207 对八种人和九种人的解说,也应当依照前面所说的方法来理解。巴利
207. Aṭṭhakanavakaniddesāpi heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
第十部分:十种解说的注释巴利
10. Dasakaniddesavaṇṇanā
209 在十者解说中,“此处”指的是欲界地。因为在欲界地里,七返有等圣者的究竟成就,就在这欲界地本身。以欲界的有身就能证得阿罗汉果,也能证入无余依涅槃,这就是这段话的意思。巴利 注疏 1
209. Dasakaniddese – idhāti kāmāvacarabhūmiyaṃ. Kāmāvacarabhūmiyañhi sattakkhattuparamādīnaṃ kāmāvacarabhūmiyaññeva niṭṭhā hoti. Kāmāvacarattabhāveneva arahattappatti ca anupādisesanibbānappatti ca hotīti attho.
在这里舍弃的意思是说:在欲界的有身中舍弃之后,安住在净居天的有身中而达到究竟。这就是它的含义。中般涅槃等类的圣者,确实就是在这里证得阿那含果,从这里命终之后,投生到净居天,以那个有身证得阿罗汉果和无余依涅槃界。因此说:“这五种人,在这里舍弃之后,达到究竟。”巴利
Idhavihāyāti idha kāmāvacare attabhāve vihāya suddhāvāsattabhāve ṭhitānaṃ niṭṭhā hotīti attho. Antarāparinibbāyiādayo hi idha anāgāmiphalaṃ patvā ito cutā suddhāvāsesu uppajjitvā tena attabhāvena arahattañceva anupādisesanibbānadhātuñca pāpuṇanti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘imesaṃ pañcannaṃ idha vihāya niṭṭhā’’ti.
世间确实没有人能比得上那位被施设为“人”的人。
导师在三十三天并非过于简略地宣说。
他的注释书,以及用岛语(僧伽罗语)编纂的内容;
并且彻底吸收了所有的阿含注释,一点都没有遗漏。
凡是意义,不论在什么地方,都善加分别而不杂乱。
从各处把它取来之后,舍弃过于冗长的部分。
不采用《清净道论》里所说的内容而编撰成的注疏;
这部注疏采用的是不太简略也不太详细的讲法。
这部经藏由七个诵分组成,
为了让法长久住世,我所做的那些造作。
我所成就的善法,藉此而达于微细、清凉的正法。
愿众生用清净的法眼来看。巴利
Yaṃ ve puggalapaññattiṃ, loke appaṭipuggalo; Nātisaṅkhepato satthā, desesi tidasālaye. Tassā aṭṭhakathañceva, dīpabhāsāya saṅkhataṃ; Āgamaṭṭhakathāyo ca, ogāhetvā asesato. Suvibhatto asaṃkiṇṇo, yo yo attho yahiṃ yahiṃ; Tato tato taṃ gahetvā, pahāya ativitthāraṃ. Visuddhimagge yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ anādāya saṅkhatā; Nātisaṅkhepavitthāra-nayenaṭṭhakathā ayaṃ. Taṃ etaṃ sattamattehi, bhāṇavārehi tantiyā; Ciraṭṭhitatthaṃ dhammassa, saṅkharontena yaṃ mayā. Sampattaṃ kusalaṃ tena, saddhammaṃ sukhumaṃ sivaṃ; Olokentu visuddhena, pāṇayo dhammacakkhunāti.